JP2022059081A - Game board - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game board featuring vibration means for the game board represented by a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine), an enclosed type game machine, and a reel game machine (slot machine).

SOLUTION: Display means 208 displays an image (a performance display of "big chance") formed after starting display of a first image 2hg in a first case in which first vibration operation (accessory vibration performance A) is executed at first timing (Fig. 22(4)) after starting display of the first image 2hg, and displays an image formed after starting display of the first image (Fig. 22(6)) even in a second case in which first vibration operation is executed at second timing (Fig. 22(6)) later than the first timing, and first vibration means 2 completes first vibration operation having longer vibration time than second vibration operation before completion of display of a certain image in both of the first case and the second case.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game console represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

Conventionally, for example, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known as one of the game consoles. In pachinko machines, it is common to provide obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls in the game area of the game board, as well as a winning opening, a starting opening, and a variable winning opening in which the game ball can win a prize. .. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player, such as paying out the prize ball (for example, Patent Document 1).

Some such game consoles are equipped with vibration means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-200320

However, there is room for improvement in the vibration means of the conventional game table.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game table having a characteristic vibration means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
The first vibrating means capable of performing the first vibrating operation,
A display means capable of displaying a first image related to the first vibration means, and a display means.
It is a game table equipped with
The first vibration means can start the execution of the first vibration operation after the first image is displayed.
The display means can display a certain image related to the hit / fail determination result after displaying the first image.
The first case where the first vibration operation is executed at the first timing after starting the display of the first image, and the first at the second timing later than the first timing. There is a second case where the vibration operation is performed, and
In the first case, the display means displays the certain image after starting the display of the first image, and even in the second case, after starting the display of the first image, the display means. It displays a certain image,
The first vibrating means ends the first vibrating operation before the end of displaying a certain image in either the first case or the second case. And
The first vibrating means is capable of performing a second vibrating operation.
The first vibration operation has a longer vibration time than the second vibration operation.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game table of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic of vibration means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). It is a functional block diagram of the pachinko machine 100. As an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 2, and (c) shows an example of the decoration. An example of a symbol is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal symbol. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of processing, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. (A) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the gaming state after the jackpot game, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of transitioning from a normal stage to a palace stage step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 12 step by step. It is the figure which showed the example step by step from the sea zone to the sky zone and the big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the case where the power is restored immediately after the power failure occurs during the confirmation display of the decorative design. It is a figure which shows an example of the event look-ahead notice step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 17 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 18 step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the event look-ahead notice step by step. (A) is a diagram showing a table relating to the accessory vibration effect A, and (b) is a diagram showing a table relating to the accessory vibration effect B. It is a figure which shows the case where the accessory vibration effect A is performed, and the case where it is not performed step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example stepwise from FIG. 22 (3). It is a figure which shows the other example in which the accessory vibration effect B is performed step by step. It is a figure which showed the table about the button vibration effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a button vibration effect step by step. (A) is a figure which showed the table about the background effect, and (b) is the figure which showed the table about the mini character effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a mini character production step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in which the character vibration production B and the mini character production are performed step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in which the time-saving game state ends shortly before the end of the time-saving game state and shifts to the non-time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 30 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example which the period length of a pull-back period is different from the example shown in FIG. 31 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 32 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in the case where there is no pullback period step by step. (A) is a diagram showing a list of music pieces that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not satisfied, and (b) is a diagram showing a list of music pieces selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is a figure which shows the list of music which is selected after the predetermined condition is satisfied even once. It is the figure which showed the example different from the example shown in FIG. 30 step by step following from FIG. 30 (h). It is a figure which shows the example in which the first hold icon h21 among the hold icons of special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure which can maintain a time saving game state is finished is a golden display mode. It is a figure which shows the example of operating the operation key unit 190 step by step in the state that the music selection display MC is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of operating the operation key unit 190 step by step during a big hit game started without satisfying a predetermined condition. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board as seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. It is a representation figure. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. As an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special symbol 2, and (c) shows an example of the decorative symbol. An example is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal symbol. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figure is correct. It is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 1st sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 2nd sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a DIP switch board. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 42. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42. It is a figure which shows the decorative body which the 2nd effect movable body 8 has. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which the display mode of a variable icon and the display mode of the background in the display of a reach title are related step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect that the animation is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device step by step by the zone effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which super reach is performed step by step which the display mode of a hold icon and the light emission mode of a star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related. It is a figure which shows one example of the effect which the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the decorative body included in the 2nd effect movable body 8 are related step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect similar to the effect in which the 2nd effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59 operates step by step. (A) is a diagram showing the title background color determination table of reach, (b) is a diagram showing the emission color determination table of the light emitting unit 71, and (c) is a diagram showing the kimono color determination table of the lord. .. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine to which this invention is applied seen from the front side (player side).

Hereinafter, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating body game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 41. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 41 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 1 to 41, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 1 to 1 to 41 are used. In the description using FIG. 41, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 41 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 104S for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 106S for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage dish is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an open lever 1080 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage dish for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage dish has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that is guided to the launcher 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 2 to 4 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and an effect button 136 that is built into the effect button 136. A button lamp 138 that emits light from the button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. It is provided with a return operation button 142 to be performed, and a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full due to a game ball. Further, the operation key unit 190 is also provided. The operation key unit 190 is provided with a decision button 1903 between the upper button 1901 and the lower button 1902, and the decision button 1903 may function as a second effect button.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching mallet 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to give a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 4). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 4) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launch of a game ball (FIG. 4). A power switch that configures a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices (see FIG. 4), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. Of the signal between the power supply board case 184 and the payout control unit 600 and the card unit that house the power supply board 182 including the 178 and the RAM clear switch 180 that outputs the RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A CR interface unit 606 for transmission / reception is provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 10A, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has double-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other, and one-digit 7-segment LEDs modularized on the right side. The bonus ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the bonus ratio (YH) and the continuous bonus ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color LED of red, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162. The details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d1 to d3 indicate the directions in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as front or front, and the back side may be referred to as back or rear. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the main body 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be referred to as at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area in which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of an effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. Below the game area 124, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol hold lamp 218. A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and the like are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , A 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in the present embodiment, the special symbol variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

Further, a time-saving medium-time lamp TL, a right-handed indicator lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium-time lamp HL are also arranged. The time-saving medium lamp TL is a lamp for indicating that the variation display time of the normal drawing is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip (electric chew), which will be described later, is in a time-saving gaming state in which it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RL is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a big hit game state or a short-time game state and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting the right side. The high-probability middle lamp HL is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or that the game state is in a high-probability state.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, there are predetermined ball advance entrances, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232. , A variable winning opening 234 is arranged.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 124, respectively. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged on the right side of the gaming area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening 226a has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls. When the ball is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a ball and enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and it is assumed that the general winning opening 226b has won a prize, and the payout device 152 is driven to obtain a predetermined number (not shown). For example, one) ball is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226a and the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226b are detected by different ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226a are provided on the left side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by different ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226b are provided on the right side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by different ball detection sensors. The balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b, the balls that have passed through the normal starting opening 228 are not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into the first special drawing start port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special drawing starting port 230 when hitting to the right. Then, in the present embodiment, the specification is to start the variable display of the special figure 2 in preference to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine having such a specification may be referred to as a "special 2 priority variable machine" or the like). Has been done.

The second special figure start port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chew), is arranged below the first special figure start port 230, has a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed on the left and right, and closes the blade member 232a. It is impossible to enter the ball inside, and when the normal map variation game is won and the normal map display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. 2 Special figure When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects an entry into the start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal drawing start opening 228 (due to the game nail (not shown)), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal drawing start opening 228 when hitting to the left. .. Therefore, during the left-handed strike, in principle, the player does not win the swing game, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 232a does not open or close. On the other hand, in the case of hitting to the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the normal drawing start port 228, the blade member 232a may open and close by winning the normal drawing variable game. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 while hitting left, but there is a possibility of winning a prize in the second special drawing starting port 232 while hitting right.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 3, or 10 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball.

In the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 and the general winning opening 226b are integrally configured in the entry unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with a V shutter VS and a V pass switch VC. The V-passing switch VC opens upward so that the game ball can pass from top to bottom. This V-passing switch VC detects a passing game ball. The V-shutter VS is arranged above the V-passing switch VC, and moves forward and backward by a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the state where the V shutter VS is advanced (corresponding to the closed state), the game ball cannot pass through the V passage switch VC, and when the V shutter VS is in the retracted state (corresponding to the open state), the game ball is V. It becomes possible to pass through the pass switch VC. A gaming ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 and has passed through a ball detection sensor (not shown) rolls to the V shutter VS after being guided to the front side, and may or may not pass through the V-pass switch VC. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The V-passing switch VS is included in various sensors 320 (see FIG. 4), and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the V passage switch VC, it is determined that the V prize has been won.

In the present embodiment, the V shutter VS is maintained in a closed state (advanced state) from the start of the jackpot game to a specific round (for example, the final round), and the V shutter VS is opened (backward) in the specific round. , V prize can be obtained. If the V prize can be won, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and if the V prize cannot be won, the control state is the special figure low probability state after the big hit game ends. It remains. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, the transition to the special figure high probability state is determined by the game ball passing through the V passing switch VS.

Further, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening is provided. There is also an out port 240 for guiding a ball or the like that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch rod and the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the ball striking direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and is used as a winning opening (general winning opening 226a, 226b, variable winning opening 234) or starting. Win a prize at the mouth (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), without winning any prize opening or start port, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228. Reach 240. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of a game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharge ball receiving port and pass through a predetermined discharge passage. It is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the pachinko machine 100.

Further, an upper effect device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, a lower effect device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and side effect devices 4 are arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. In the case of the present embodiment, these effect devices 2 to 4 are supported by the main body 104.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (it is assumed that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc., and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, for example). A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp, etc.), and a predetermined movable member, for example, as an ordinary electric accessory. The drive means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232, the door member 234a for the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory, the drive means for driving the V shutter VS, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won a prize at the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly obtained. It is latched and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the second special figure.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so as not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 controls the drive of the sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and various (upper / lower / side) effect devices 2 to 4. A drive circuit 422 for this purpose, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 4, and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like stored in ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the CR interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor 106S that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 operates the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by the payout control unit 600 to indicate the launch permission or stop, and the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current and converts it into a predetermined voltage to control each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special figures and general figures to be used.

Special Figure 1 The variable game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special drawing 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed multiple times in succession.

FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, three types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure c", are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special symbol a” and “special diagram b”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of the special diagram 1. "Special figure a" is a 3 round (R) probability change jackpot symbol that is scheduled to acquire probability variation, and "special figure b" is a 3R normal jackpot symbol that has no chance of acquiring probability variation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, the probability variation acquisition (transition to the special figure high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V passage switch VS. When the special figure a is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS opens (retracts) and the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS when the player enters the third round, which is the final round of the big hit game. It will be possible. If the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS (if a V prize is won), the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and the shifted special figure high probability state shifts to the jackpot game. It is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times after the end. In the present embodiment, if the V-shutter VS is opened, there is sufficient time to maintain the open state, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V-passing switch VS. It can be said that it is a big hit scheduled (the same applies to "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" described later). On the other hand, when the special figure b is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS does not open even if the player enters the third round, which is the final round of the big hit game, and the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS. Nothing is done (V prize cannot be won), and the control state remains the special low probability state after the big hit game is completed. As described above, it was necessary to win a V prize for the transition to the special high-probability state, but the transition to the normal high-probability state is started on condition that the big hit game is completed. That is, if a big hit is made, the state shifts to the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and in the shifted normal figure high probability state, even if the symbol variation display of the special figure is the special figure a after the big hit game ends. For example, it is maintained 120 times, and in the case of special figure b, it is maintained for 50 times.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of lost symbol (“special symbol c”) is prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special diagram 1.

FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 5 (b), four types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure D" are shown, and two kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure A" and "special figure D". Figure B "). "Special figure A" is a 10R probability change jackpot symbol scheduled to be acquired, and "special figure B" is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol scheduled to be acquired. That is, if the special figure A wins a V prize in the 10th round, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state, the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and the special figure A waits after the big hit game ends. The state is maintained while the symbol variation display of is performed 120 times. If the special figure B wins a V prize in the second round, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state, the normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends, and the special figure symbol after the big hit game ends. The state is maintained while the variation display is performed 120 times here as well.

Further, in the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols (“Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of Special Figure 2. "Special figure C" is the same general lost symbol as "special figure c", but "special figure D" is a special symbol called a time-saving symbol, which will be described in detail later.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination of the jackpot symbol to be stopped is performed by a lottery of software random numbers. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable game for a specific period, whether or not the "sudden time reduction" is won is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and if the "sudden time reduction" is won, the second special figure is displayed. The "time saving symbol" is stopped and displayed on the device 214. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the game shifts to the high probability state of the normal figure after the end of the big hit game. The high-probability state of the normal figure is called a time-saving game state (electric support state). Here, the time-saving game state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-time-saving game state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time-saving game state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a time saving game state and a high probability state in the normal figure. In the high-probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low-probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal-figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-time-saving game state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in the normal-figure high-probability state (time-saving game state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the short-time game state than in the non-short-time game state (normal-time short-time game state). For example, in the non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal map variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-time-saving gaming state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-time saving game state, the electric chew opening period of 0.2 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the time saving game state. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the blade member 232a is more likely to open than in the non-time-saving gaming state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-time-saving game state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the time-saving game state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-time saving game state is maintained. This may be disadvantageous to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. Because there is. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is simply described as "non-time saving game state", it shall be excluded during the big hit game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, all of the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the electric chew opening period, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are performed, but at least one of these is performed. For example, the player's advantage becomes high, and the player may be in a time-saving gaming state. In this case, even if the execution is changed among the time-saving game states of a-time reduction, b-time reduction, and c-time reduction, which will be described later, among the time-saving game states, the normal-figure probability change, the normal-figure change-shortening, the electric chew opening period extension, and the electric chew opening frequency increase. good. For example, in the case of a time reduction, the normal figure probability change, the normal figure change short, the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening times are all performed. Either one or two of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of times of electric chew opening may be executed. Alternatively, if either the electric chew opening period is extended or the number of times the electric chew is opened is increased, which increases the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the game may be in a time-saving gaming state. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the time-saving game state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure a", "special figure A", and "special figure B" are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure 120 times after the end of the subsequent big hit game is displayed. The time-saving game state (normal figure high probability state) is maintained until the game is performed, and the game shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal figure low probability state) at the 121st time. Further, when the "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state (high probability state of the normal figure) is maintained until the variable display of the special figure is performed 50 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter. At the second time, it shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal probability low probability state). In addition, in this embodiment, the big hit symbol of all the special figures is made to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, but even if the big hit symbol (non-time-saving big hit symbol) that does not shift to the time-saving game state is provided. Often, when a big hit is made with a non-time-saving big hit symbol, the game may not be changed to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, but may remain in the non-time-saving game state. Further, a small hit symbol may be prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined time (for example, twice), and the door member 234a operates once. Keep open for up to 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 234a in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 13 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 13". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variation display of design" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying that it is a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot of "special symbol b"), decorative symbols having the same number are located in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the middle symbol display area 208b. Stops and displays the combination of decorative patterns in which the decoration 13 is located (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 13-decoration 1", "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2", etc.). On the other hand, when notifying the probability variation jackpot (3R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure a", 10R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure A", 2R probability variation jackpot of "Special Figure B"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol c" or "special symbol C", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying that the winner is suddenly won in a short time, three "decoration 11" are displayed side by side instead of the combination of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10".

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a zone effect may be executed as one of the effects. The zone effect is a look-ahead advance notice effect in which the background displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes to a background corresponding to the zone. There are a plurality of types of zone effect execution start timings, which may be started when the decorative symbol starts to change. When the sky zone effect is started at the start of the change of the decorative symbol, three "decoration 12" are displayed side by side at the timing when the previous decorative symbol change display ends. Hereinafter, the "decoration 12" may be referred to as a zone entry symbol. It should be noted that the zone effect may include an effect in which three zone entry symbols are displayed side by side. That is, in this case, the execution start timing of the zone effect is the timing when three zone entry symbols are displayed side by side.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 5D shows an example of a stop symbol mode of a normal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal map of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public map A" and a missed symbol "Public map B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 has all seven segments lit and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of the normal map" (variable game of the normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the hit symbol "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for the special figure. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for a special figure divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of a win / fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random number value storage area for ordinary figures is also prepared. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in the winning order (holding order) one set for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission and initial value setting etc. are performed. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step is returned to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a store clerk or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that this is the case (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting (main setting) in the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of RAM 308, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4, including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area of this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned pre-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that), when the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230 and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is determined that there was a passage. That is, it is determined that there has been a prize in these winning openings 234,226 and these starting openings 230,232,228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the starting port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is performed, but the detection signals for the past three times are performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. Special figure Update the random number counter to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the normal figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I'll keep it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter is updated. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is used. Read and add 1 to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal map state update process in the middle of the normal map fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

In addition, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the normal map fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal map display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a display mode of a lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for making various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal diagram A shown in FIG. 5 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is set to the setting area during operation, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal map state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be non-operating. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal number winning random number stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If a winning decision is made, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special figure display device 214 performs the variable display of special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on. Is special figure B when the special figure A and 2R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5 (b) is on, special figure C when the loss flag is on, and special figure when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on. D The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed so as to be in each mode, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. .. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram A), a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram B), a lost symbol (special symbol C), and a time saving symbol (special symbol D). ), One of the symbols is confirmed and displayed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the time reduction flag is turned off. .. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 2, the symbol for stopping the variable display while additionally storing the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the storage area with information indicating the closure period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in the final round of the jackpot with probability variation (10 rounds in the special figure A and 2 rounds in the special figure B), the V shutter is used for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds). A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in the open state is output to the solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the VS (a part of various solenoids 332), and the opening period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing the V-shutter opening time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information to be shown. Then, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS (V shutter opening / closing drive) ( A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the closed state is output to a part of various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for a period (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)) of displaying an image notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and acquired the probability change, the RAM 308 is used. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided, information indicating the V winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (excluding the first time, 9 rounds or 1 round) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). ) That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect is produced in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the waiting period.

If the 10R jackpot flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. Even when the 2R jackpot flag is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the time reduction number (950 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal map, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal map is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal map. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the fluctuation time of the variable game of the normal map is shorter than that in the low-probability state of the normal map (normal map variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 will be entered during the jackpot game, and many gaming balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 until the gaming balls enter. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit may increase and the gambling may increase, and this is to solve the problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the first special figure display device 212 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the first special figure display device 212 performs the variable display of special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 3R jackpot flag A, a 3R jackpot flag B, and a missed flag. These flags are set to be on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 3R jackpot flag A is on. The first special figure is shown in FIG. 5 (a) so that the special figure a and the 3R jackpot flag B are on, the special figure b is turned on, and the missed flag is turned on, the special figure c is shown. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the display device 212 is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the first special symbol display device 212 has one of the 3R probability variation jackpot symbol (special symbol a), the 3R normal jackpot symbol (special symbol b), and the lost symbol (special symbol c). Confirmation is displayed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the time reduction flag is turned off. .. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 1, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 1 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 1 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the storage area with information indicating the closure period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, in the special figure 1 state update process in the final round (3 rounds), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS (for example, 10 seconds) (for example, 10 seconds) A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in the open state is output to (a part of various solenoids 332), and information indicating the release period is set in the storage area of the V-shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Then, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the V shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening / closing the V shutter VS (V shutter opening / closing drive) ( A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the closed state is output to a part of various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, in order to wait for a period (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)) of displaying an image notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and acquired the probability change, the RAM 308 is used. In the storage area of the special figure 1 standby time management timer provided, information indicating the V winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (two rounds excluding the first time) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol display device. In order to set the player to wait for a period of time while displaying an image notifying the player that the jackpot by 208 is finished, information indicating the effect waiting period is displayed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. If the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (120 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag. Even when the 3R jackpot flag B is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number (50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the flag. In the special figure 1 state update process, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is not set to on.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operating state of Special Figure 1 is set. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. The execution is performed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230 is prioritized. In this exemplary embodiment, the special figure variable game with high advantage (special figure 2 variable game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variable game with low advantage (special figure 1 variable game in this example). Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 receives the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information, etc., the winning / failing determination table stored in the ROM 306 is used. Decide whether to make a big hit or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Further, even in the case of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1, it is determined whether the hit is a big hit or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area and specially. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. Although the special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the upper limit of the number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the upper limit number of the hold is 4 in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update is not limited to this. By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special drawings may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a setting command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the (stop rotation) command, the values of various jackpot flags and missed flags are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the number of jackpot rounds is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a special figure 1 starting port 230 has won a prize, whether or not a special figure 2 starting port 232 has won a prize, whether or not a variable winning opening 234 has won a prize, etc. including. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is selected by the various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308. Set the timer number, the information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, missed flag values, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Set information indicating the number of variable games or special figure 2 variable games. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence / absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the first special drawing display device are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to 212, the second special figure display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like are set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 8A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is an instruction to various effect devices 2 to 4 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 8B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other effects random value value update processes are performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization process of storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 9B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 9C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443 following step S441, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 9D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to have a bonus ratio monitor and a setting monitor, and the bonus ratio monitor includes a continuous bonus ratio (RY) and a bonus ratio (). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously activated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, variable winning during the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the mouth 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning a prize in the variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls. In addition, the bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234 are opened to win a prize. It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous bonus ratio is blinked and then displayed. The security signal (RY) is output to. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly carry out the type application test for the gaming machine.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the accessory ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 10B, eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch board 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. It is possible to set the appearance rate, the entry rate of the effect mode, and the like.

Next, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described, although there are some overlaps with those described so far.

FIG. 11A is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the gaming state after the jackpot game.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, when the setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in FIG. 6, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability becomes 1/320, and the special figure The jackpot probability with high probability is 1/91. When setting 2 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/315, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/90. When the setting 3 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/310, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/88. When setting 4 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/305, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/87. When the setting 5 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/300, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/85. When the setting 6 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special figure low probability is 1/295, and the jackpot probability with the special figure high probability is 1/84. The larger the setting value, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, while the probability of winning a map with a low probability of a map is 1/100, the probability of winning a map with a high probability of a map is 99/100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11A, the breakdown of the special figure a and the special figure b is equal (50% each) in the special figure 1, and the breakdown of the special figure A and the special figure B in the special figure 2. Is 7: 3.

Further, in the special figure a of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS is opened only in the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. When the game ball passes through this V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is ON), the probability variation is attached, so that the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. This state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation region is OFF), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is changed. , The symbol variation display of the special figure is maintained for 120 times.

In the special figure b of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS does not open even in the third round, which is the final round, and therefore the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC. Therefore, the game state after the end of the big hit game is limited to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is maintained while the special figure symbol variation display is performed 50 times.

In the special figure A of the special figure 2, the V shutter VS is opened only in the 10th round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. In the special figure B, the V shutter VS opens only in the second round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. In both the special figure A and the special figure B, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC (when the probability variation operation area is ON), the game state after the big hit game ends is the special figure high probability normal figure. It becomes a high-probability state, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 120 times. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC (when the probability variation operation region is OFF), the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and this state is changed. , The symbol variation display of the special figure is maintained for 120 times.

After the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is maintained a predetermined number of times, the state shifts to the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The time reduction that starts after the big hit game is said to be a time reduction.

FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is recommended to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area in order to aim at the special figure 1 starting port 230. That is, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, even if the ball is entered into the normal figure start port 228, the player hardly wins the normal figure variable game and should not make a right-handed hit. The ball should be fired towards the left area (should be left-handed). The normal state is a non-time saving game state.

On the other hand, in a time-saving game state such as a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, it is easy to win the normal figure fluctuation game, so in order to aim at the normal figure start opening 228, in the game area It is recommended to launch the game ball toward the right area where the starting port 228 is provided. That is, as shown in the breakdown of FIG. 11A, the probability of obtaining a jackpot with probability variation (special figure a) is 50% in special figure 1, whereas in special figure 2, with probability variation. The probability of getting a big hit is 100%. Further, the number of times that the time-saving game state is maintained after the big hit game may be 50 times in the special figure 1, whereas it is always 120 times in the special figure 2. Therefore, since it is easier for the player to obtain a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1, the second special figure start opening 232 should be won and the big hit in the special figure 2 should be aimed at. .. Therefore, the player should shoot the game ball toward the right side region (should hit right).

Further, in the case of a big hit game, in order to aim at the variable winning opening 234, the game ball is fired (right-handed) toward the right side area where the variable winning opening 234 is provided in the game area. Become. FIG. 11B shows that after the big hit game is completed, the time-saving game state may be maintained 120 times or 50 times.

Further, in FIG. 11B, when the special figure is not hit even once while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times in the special figure low probability state (time saving game state, non-time saving gaming state). That is, when the special figure is lost 950 times continuously, the time-saving gaming state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 1100 times. The period during which the time-saving game state is maintained as a result of the special figure loss being continued a predetermined time is called the play time, and this time reduction is called the b time reduction. b The time-saving game state can be shifted only once before the first hit after the power is turned on, and after the big hit, it can be shifted only once before the next big hit. Therefore, if the special figure loss of 950 times is continuous in the b time reduction game state, there is no new transition to the b time reduction game state, and the b time reduction game state so far is continued, and the special figure loss of 1100 times occurs. If it is continuous, it shifts to the non-time saving game state (normal state). It should be noted that the count of the number of consecutive losses, which is a condition for shifting to the b time-saving game state, includes the number of consecutive losses in the a time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state described later.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the time-saving symbol may be stopped and displayed only in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. The time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed and the transition is made is called c time-saving. This time-saving symbol is a hold of special figure 2 remaining at the end of the time-saving game state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) (hereinafter, "special figure 2 remaining"). It may be referred to as "hold".) In the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of being digested in the non-time saving game state, c time saving may be won. When the c time reduction is won, the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 3), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the "decoration 11" (time reduction decorative symbol) shown in FIG. 5 (c). ) Are displayed side by side and stopped. Then, while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 950 times, the time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is maintained. That is, it shifts to the c time saving game state without going through the big hit game. The probability of winning suddenly is 1/90. In addition, the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time-saving game state started after the big hit game ends, and the special figure 2 at the time when the b time-saving game state when the 950 times special figure loss is continuously started are finished. In addition to the remaining hold, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 remaining hold at the time when the time-saving game state started by suddenly winning in a short time will be won again in a sudden time reduction.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving symbol may be won even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the b time saving game state. Also in this case, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 3). However, on the decorative symbol display device 208, three "decoration 11" (decorative symbols for shortening the time) shown in FIG. .. Then, in the present embodiment, since the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state and the b time short game state are prioritized over the c time saving game state, the second special figure display device 214 Even if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving symbol is invalidated and the game is not changed to the time-saving gaming state.

Furthermore, even if you hit right in a non-time saving game state, win a normal figure fluctuation game with a probability of 1/100, and win a prize at the 2nd special figure start opening 232 (electric chew), if you win in c time saving There is, and it shifts to the c time saving game state without being invalidated. That is, not only the special figure 2 remaining hold but also a new special figure 2 hold may shift to the c time saving game state. In addition, it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to win a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) in the non-time saving gaming state. For example, even if the game ball enters the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure variable game may not be won, or even if the normal figure variable game is won, the opening pattern of the blade member 232a may be set. The opening pattern may be an extremely difficult (impossible) opening pattern to win a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew).

In addition, the conditions for transitioning to the b-time-shortened gaming state are all satisfied by losing all in the c-time-shortened gaming state (becoming a special figure loss 950 times in a row), and the transition from the c-time-shortened gaming state to the b-time-saving gaming state is achieved. In some cases.

In this embodiment, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 even in the special figure high-probability normal-figure high-probability state, the special-figure low-probability normal-figure high-probability state, and the time-saving game state. However, the stop display may not be displayed. That is, the stop display may not be performed except for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving game state.

Subsequently, a specific game progress example in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of types of stages are prepared. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of transition from the normal stage to the palace stage. In this example, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (1) displays a background (a white background without a pattern) representing a non-time saving gaming state.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (1) is provided with a fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the hold number, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 is displayed in the upper left part. An area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Special Figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area (fourth symbol) of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right portion, and a symbol changing notification area (fourth symbol) of special figure 2 is provided in the lower right portion. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the normal map and a hold number display area of the normal map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1 is matched with the holding number shown in the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 is the holding lamp 220 of the special drawing 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1, while the symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is off, it is displayed as "×". Stop is displayed. Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol change display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG. 29. Further, the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol may be displayed by a display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device, a lamp, etc.) different from the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (1), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. That is, the downward fluctuation, which is the fluctuation direction, is performed at high speed. Further, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This mini symbol starts the variable display in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and is stopped in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. In other words, the variation display of the mini symbol is performed in correspondence with (synchronization) the variation display of the special symbol, and the execution state of the variation display of the special symbol is notified (suggested) to the player depending on the variation state of the mini symbol. It is supposed to be done.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is displayed. The variable icon shown in FIG. 12 (1) is a round, non-patterned and green display mode. On the drawing, the green color of the icon is indicated by hatching that faces diagonally downward to the right (hereinafter the same). The variation icon suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display by the display mode. That is, the variable icon usually has a function as a notice depending on the display mode. The green display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 25%.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-time saving game state, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is represented by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 218 of the special figure 1, the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1, and the number of the holding icons of the special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon closer to the variable icon display area 280 (the hold icon on the left side) becomes the older hold icon.

In FIG. 12 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 is a round patternless pattern. It is a white display mode. On the drawing, the whiteness of the icon is indicated by hatching that faces diagonally downward to the right (hereinafter the same). Further, the second hold icon h12 is a round, non-patterned and red display mode. On the drawing, the red color of the icon is indicated by diagonal cross-hatching (hereinafter the same). Further, the third hold icon h12 is a round, non-patterned and green display mode, which is the same as the display mode of the variable icon. The hold icon suggests the expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead notice depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display performed by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon. The default display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. It may be suggested that the jackpot expectation is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit in the first place. In the following description, if it is the default display mode, the description to that effect may be omitted. In addition, the red display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 50%. The green display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 25%, as described in the display mode of the variable icon.

In FIG. 12 (2), a pseudo-continuous effect is started in the variable display of the decorative pattern. The pseudo-continuous effect is a variation display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed multiple times in one variation display of the special symbol, and the result of one hit / fail judgment (lottery) is displayed. Despite the fact that there is, it is a variable display of the decorative pattern that makes it appear as if the result of the hit / miss judgment was displayed multiple times. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (2), a pseudo-ream symbol (decorative symbol described as “NEXT”) suggesting a pseudo-ream effect is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the left symbol is displayed. "Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the area 208a, and "Decoration 7" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the high-speed fluctuation in the variation display of the decorative symbol, it is not possible to confirm what kind of symbol the decorative symbol is, but in the temporary stop display, it is possible to confirm what kind of symbol the decorative symbol is. In the temporary stop display, the decorative design is swaying and moving at an extremely low speed. On the other hand, the mini symbol in the upper left corner continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner, the blinking "-" indicating that the symbol in the special figure 1 is being displayed is continuously blinking. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (3), the display screen is blacked out and the decorative symbol cannot be seen. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. Also in FIG. 12 (3), the mini symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, the blinking display of “-” indicating that the symbol in the special figure 1 is being displayed is continuously displayed. ..

Eventually, the blackout ends and the decorative design begins to change again. FIG. 12 (4) shows a state immediately before the blackout is completed and the second variation (re-variation) in the pseudo-continuous production is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (4), the character "x2" indicating that the blackout is completed and the second fluctuation is started is displayed. Further, when the blackout is completed, in FIG. 12 (2), "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b where the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols displayed as a temporary stop is different from the combination of the decorative symbols when the re-variation is started. Here, the types of decorative symbols themselves in the middle symbol display area 208b are different. This difference makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the temporary stop display and the start of the revariation display. Further, if the combination of the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped and the combination of the decorative symbols at the start of re-variation are the same, the player will again have a pseudo-continuous symbol when the blackout is completed. May be mistaken for the temporary stop display. However, as shown in FIGS. 12 (2) to 12 (4), by making the combination of the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped different from the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of starting the re-variation, such a game It is possible to prevent a person from misunderstanding. In FIG. 12 (5) following FIG. 12 (4), the second variation (re-variation) of the decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 12 (6), the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and it can be confirmed that the decorative symbol is “decoration 5”. In FIG. 12 (7), the right symbol display area can be confirmed. A decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208c, and it can be confirmed that the decorative symbol is "decoration 1". In the following FIG. 12 (8), the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it can be confirmed that the decorative symbol is “decoration 4”. In FIG. 12 (8), a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation display). Eventually, as shown in FIG. 12 (9), a definite display is performed, and a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is completely stopped and displayed. That is, the decorative pattern does not move during the confirmation display. Even in this definite display, it is naturally possible to confirm what kind of symbol the decorative symbol is.

Further, the variable icon h0 that was displayed during the temporary stop display disappears when the confirmation display is started.

During the final display of the decorative pattern, a wipe effect for changing the stage is executed. In FIG. 12 (10), the wipe effect is started. In the wipe effect, the wipe display wp expands from the lower left corner and the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the wipe display wp covers the display screen and the wipe out wp disappears from the display screen. Will be executed. The wipe display wp overlaps and disappears from the decorative symbol and the hold icon, but the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during the wipe effect. The wipe-in that started in FIG. 12 (10) is completed in FIG. 11 (11), and the decorative symbol and the hold icon are not visible in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (11). In the following FIG. 12 (12), the wipe-out is performed, and a part of the decorative pattern and the hold icon are becoming visible. A stage change occurs when the wipe-in is complete or when the wipe-out begins. In this example, the stage is changed from the normal stage to the palace stage. The decorative design that has become visible after the wipeout has started is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the changed stage. This display mode will be described later. When the wipe out is completed, the wipe effect ends. Further, when the wipe effect is completed, the symbol variation display of the next special figure is started. FIG. 12 (13) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the symbol variation display of the next special figure is started. In FIG. 12 (13), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. In the variable display of the decorative pattern, the operation at the start of the variable display is performed at the start of the variable display. The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 12 (13) is operated at the start of this fluctuation display, and is slightly moved in the direction opposite to the fluctuation direction (upward). In the operation at the start of fluctuation, the decorative pattern is displayed in a recognizable state. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, the downward variation display of the decorative symbol is performed following the operation at the start of the variation.

Further, since the stage was changed from the normal stage to the palace stage, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (13) displays the character YM1 of the palace on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. .. The character YM1 of this lord is displayed as an animation. Further, in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, a display YM2 of a character different for each type of the decorative symbol is additionally displayed. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of decorative symbols is "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" in which a display YM2 of a different character is additionally displayed for each type of decorative symbol. The operation at the start of fluctuation is performed with the combination. As a result, the combination of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the previous decorative symbol variation display (“Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1” shown in FIG. 12 (8)) and the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (Fig. A combination of the "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" shown in 12 (9) and the decorative symbol at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (at the start time or immediately after the start) (FIG. 12 (13). ), The display YM2 of a character different for each type of decorative pattern is additionally displayed, which is different from "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1"). Here, the decorative symbols are the same, but the presence or absence of the display YM2 of a different character differs depending on the type of the decorative symbol, and the types of the decorative symbols are the same, but the display mode is different. The difference in the decorative symbols in this way makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the previous stop display and the start of the current variable display. Also, it will be easier to confirm that the stage has been changed.

In addition, in FIG. 12 (13), the mini symbol and the fourth symbol have already changed at high speed, but at the start of the fluctuation, the displayed mini symbol and the fourth symbol are displayed (display in FIG. 12 (9)). It is assumed that the fluctuation starts from the symbol with the same display as. That is, the display of the mini symbol or the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 12 (9)) according to the final display of the special symbol, and the variation display or the fourth symbol of the mini symbol according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display of is started (the display immediately before FIG. 12 (13)) is the same.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (13), the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 12 (14) is an icon of the default display mode. Further, the icon that was the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and the icon that was the third hold icon h12 becomes the second hold icon h12.

In addition, it is difficult to visually recognize the displayed contents of the part that has begun to be seen by the wipeout due to the effect display such as light emission (see FIG. 14 (7)), and when the wipeout is completed, the effect display is also terminated and the displayed contents can be visually recognized. May be. Alternatively, the stage change may be performed when the wipeout is completed.

In FIG. 12 (14), the decorative symbol variation display becomes a high-speed downward variation, making it difficult to confirm the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (15), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also here, in the lower left corner of each decorative symbol, a display YM2 of a character different for each type of decorative symbol is additionally displayed.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 12 step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (16) following from FIG. 12 (15), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 9-decoration 2-decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. Also here, in the lower left corner of each decorative symbol, a display YM2 of a character different for each type of decorative symbol is additionally displayed. In addition, the character YM1 of the lord who is displayed in animation is depressed.

In FIG. 13 (17), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 13 (17) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. In addition, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 13 (17) is an icon in a red display mode.

The period from the start of the temporary stop display of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" to the end of the final display (Fig. 12 (8) to Fig. 12) is the "Decoration 9-Decoration". It is longer than the period (FIGS. 12 (15) to 13 (16)) from the start of the temporary stop display of "2-Decoration 4" to the end of the final display.

In FIG. 13 (18), the decorative symbol variation display becomes a high-speed downward variation, making it difficult to confirm the decorative symbol.

In the following FIG. 13 (19), the reach state is established, and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, the display YM2 of the princess character is additionally displayed in the lower left corner of the "decoration 2" that is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 13 (20), it has evolved into a super (SP) reach, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. In addition, the animation display of the character YM1 of the lord, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear, and the decorative design that had been displayed large in the center of the display screen is reduced to the lower right corner of the display screen. It is displayed. The mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during super reach.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (21), an animation showing the lord who won the enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a normal big hit such as "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2" ("decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2"). The combination of the decorative symbols of "Special Figure b" (3R normal jackpot) is displayed as a temporary stop. Although the display YM2 of a character different for each type of decorative symbol is not additionally displayed on the decoration 13, it may be additionally displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (22), a combination of normal jackpot decorative symbols such as "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed, and then a three-round jackpot game is started. (Fig. 13 (23)). When the big hit game is completed, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (time saving game state).

In FIG. 13 (24), the big hit game is completed, and the state shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (time saving game state). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (24) displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state.

Further, in FIG. 13 (24), the second special symbol start port 232 has a continuous winning of three balls, the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also has the decorative symbol. The variable display has started. The decorative design shown in FIG. 13 (17) is operated at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol is "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", and the operation at the start of variation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols. As a result, the combination of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed (“decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2” shown in FIG. 13 (21)) and the combination of the decorative symbols confirmed and displayed (“decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2”) (FIG. 13 (22)). Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2 ") and the combination of the decorative symbols when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (at the start time or immediately after the start) ("Decoration 2-" shown in FIG. 13 (24). It is different from decoration 2-decoration 2 "). Here, the types of decorative symbols themselves in the middle symbol display area 208b are different. In particular, the fact that the decoration 13 is not displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol does not give the player the misunderstanding that he has hit the jackpot again.

Further, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the change icon display area 280 on which the change icon h0 is displayed, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed.

Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "remaining 49" is displayed as a display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state indicating that the time-saving game state continues 49 times. Further, a right-handed first display RH1 for prompting right-handed is displayed on the left side of the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. This right-handed first display RH1 is a display that continues to be displayed even when the symbol variation display of the special figure ends during the time-saving game state, and continues to be displayed even when the demo screen is displayed.

In addition, although FIG. 13 (24) is a scene where the fluctuation has already started, the decorative design (“decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) and the mini are before the next fluctuation starts after the end of the big hit game. It is assumed that the symbol (“2-2-2”) and the fourth symbol are displayed for a moment in a state where they can be confirmed. That is, the display of the mini symbol or the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 13 (22)) according to the final display of the special symbol, and the variation display or the fourth symbol of the mini symbol according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display of is started (the display immediately before FIG. 13 (24)) is the same.

In FIG. 13 (25), the decorative symbol variation display becomes a high-speed downward variation, making it difficult to confirm the decorative symbol.

The operation at the start of the variable display may be an operation in which the decorative symbol sways, an operation in which the decorative symbol expands or contracts, or the like, in addition to an operation in which the decorative symbol moves slightly in the direction opposite to the variable direction. In any case, it is an operation that can confirm the decorative pattern.

Next, an example of zone production will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a stepwise example from the sea zone to the sky zone and a big hit.

In this example, it is a time-saving game state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) and right-handed is recommended. In the time-saving game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state, but in this example, the background corresponding to the zone is displayed. Further, on the left side of the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the right-handed first display RH1 for prompting right-handed is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a time-saving game state remaining number of times display is also displayed.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (1) displays the background of the sea according to the sea zone. Further, in FIG. 14 (1), the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 14 (1) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. The second hold icon h22 is an icon in a red display mode.

In FIG. 14 (2), the decorative symbol variation display is a downward high-speed variation.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (3), the temporary stop display is performed in a state where three zone entry symbols of the decoration 12 are aligned. It should be noted that there is one ball entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 is increased to 3, and the holding icon h23 of the third eye is additionally displayed.

In the following FIG. 14 (4), the final display of the special figure 2 in the second special figure display device 214 is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" is confirmed. The display starts. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x" indicating the deviation, and "256" is stopped and displayed in the mini symbol.

When the final display of the decorative pattern is started, the fusuma image fs appears from the left and right of the display screen (FIG. 14 (5)), and the entire display screen becomes the fusuma image fs by the animation of closing the fusuma (FIG. 14 (5)). 6)). The background image, the combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12", and the hold icons h21 to h23 are overlapped by the fusuma image fs and cannot be seen. The display in is visible.

As shown in FIG. 14 (6), when the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the fusuma image fs, the zone shift is performed and the zone shifts to the empty zone. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (7), the sliding doors begin to open, the back of the sliding doors begins to be visible, and the sky background corresponding to the sky zone is displayed. The sky zone is a look-ahead notice with a higher expectation of a big hit than the sea zone. It should be noted that the decorative design or the background image may not be visible due to an effect display or the like until the sliding doors are fully opened. The timing of the zone transition may be the timing when the sliding doors are fully opened, or the timing according to the start of the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214.

In addition, the sliding doors begin to open, and in the back of the sliding doors, the combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed instead of the combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12". It is beginning to be seen.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (8), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door image fs disappears. In FIG. 14 (8), the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 14 (8) is operated at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol is also "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the operation at the start of variation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols. As a result, the combination of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed (“decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12” shown in FIG. 14 (3)) and the combination of the decorative symbols at the time when the final display is started (FIG. 14 (4)). ) And the combination of the decorative symbol when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (at the start time or immediately after the start) (shown in FIG. 14 (8)). It is different from "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6"). Here, the types of all decorative patterns themselves are different. In this way, the decoration 12 is not displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, so that the player does not have to misunderstand that the zone entry symbol has stopped again. In addition, since the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol is the combination of the decorative symbols of the loose eyes indicating the loss, it is not necessary to give the player a misunderstanding that the player has made a big hit. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol matches the combination of the mini symbols stopped and displayed in FIG. 14 (4). However, it does not have to match, and the display of the decorative symbol at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol may be a display that can be recognized as a loss at a glance (for example, a display of loose stitches).

In addition, in FIG. 14 (8), the mini symbol and the fourth symbol have already changed at high speed, but at the start of the fluctuation, the displayed mini symbol and the fourth symbol are displayed (display in FIG. 14 (4)). It is assumed that the fluctuation starts from the symbol with the same display as. That is, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 14 (4)) according to the final display of the special symbol, and the variation display and the fourth symbol of the mini symbol according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display of (8) is started (the display immediately before FIG. 14 (8)) is the same.

At the stage when the sliding doors start to open and the back of the sliding doors begins to be seen (stage 14 (7)), the combination of decorative patterns remains the display of "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12", and the next At the time of starting the variable display of the decorative pattern of, it may become "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6".

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (8), the variation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol are also started. Further, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 is a green display mode. Further, the icon that was previously the second hold icon h22 is now the first hold icon h21. The first hold icon h21 is a red display mode.

In FIG. 14 (9), the decorative symbol variation display becomes a high-speed downward variation, making it difficult to confirm the decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (9), the serif notice display sf1 is displayed. The serif notice is a normal notice that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display by the serif. If the dialogue notice here includes the dialogue "sun", the expectation of a big hit will be high.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (10), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 9" is temporarily stopped and displayed. It should be noted that there are two balls entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is increased to 4, and the third hold icon h23 and the fourth hold icon h24 are additionally displayed. In the following FIG. 14 (11), a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 9" is confirmed and displayed.

In FIG. 14 (12), the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 14 (12) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. In addition, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 14 (13) is an icon in a red display mode. Further, the zone effect of the sky zone is continued, and the background image of the decorative pattern display device 208 is the sky background.

The period from the start of the temporary stop display of "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12" to the end of the final display (Fig. 14 (3) to Fig. (7)) is "Decoration 7-Decoration". It is longer than the period (FIGS. 14 (10) to 11) from the start of the temporary stop display of "2-Decoration 9" to the end of the final display.

In FIG. 14 (13), the decorative symbol variation display is a downward high-speed variation. Also here, the dialogue notice, which is a normal notice, is given. The dialogue notice display sf2 in FIG. 14 (13) includes the dialogue "sun", and the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the dialogue notice display sf1 in FIG. 14 (9).

In the following FIG. 14 (14), the reach state is established, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 14 (15), it has evolved into a super reach, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. Further, the background display, the variable icon display area 280, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 have disappeared, and the decorative symbol that has been largely displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during super reach.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 step by step.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (16) following from FIG. 14 (15), an animation showing the lord who won the enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration" is displayed. A combination of decorative symbols such as "7" is displayed as a temporary stop.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (17), a combination of jackpot decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. There is. Further, in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284, the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777".

In FIG. 15 (18), the opening effect of the big hit game has started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character display of congratulations on the big hit. Further, since the variable winning opening 234 is arranged in the right side region, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed. Further, at the start of the big hit game (during the opening effect), the right-handed second display RH2 that prompts the right-handed player is also displayed in addition to the right-handed first display RH1. This right-handed second display RH2 is a display mode in which the characters "hit on the right side" are displayed between the right-pointing arrows lined up at intervals, and is larger than the right-handed first display RH1. be.

In FIG. 15 (19), the first round has started, and the right-handed second display RH2 has disappeared and is hidden, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. In the following FIG. 15 (20), the second round has started. In the 2R probability variation jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in this second round (final round), and V prizes can be obtained. On the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the second round has started, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, which prompts the V-passing switch VS to pass the game ball.

In FIG. 15 (21), the game ball passes through the V-passing switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the V-winning has been won. That is, it is notified that the state will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game is completed.

In FIG. 15 (22), the end effect of the big hit game is started, and the character display of the end of the big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed during the period of the big hit game, and is also displayed in this end effect.

When the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to the special high-probability high-probability state. In FIG. 15 (23), the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 15 (23) is operated at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of decorative symbols is the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot when the jackpot is hit first, "Decorative Figure 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" (see FIG. 15 (17)). It is the same combination of decorative symbols as above, and the operation at the start of fluctuation is performed with this combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (23) displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "remaining 119" are displayed as the display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state.

In addition, although FIG. 15 (23) is a scene where the fluctuation has already started, the decorative design (here, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”” is shown before the next fluctuation starts after the end of the big hit game. ), The mini symbol (here, "7-7-7") and the fourth symbol shall be displayed for a moment in a state where they can be confirmed. That is, the display of the mini symbol or the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 15 (17)) according to the final display of the special symbol, and the variation display or the fourth symbol of the mini symbol according to the start of the variation display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display of is started (the display immediately before FIG. 15 (23)) is the same. In FIG. 15 (24), the decorative symbol variation display is a downward high-speed variation.

As a combination of decorative symbols displayed at the end of the jackpot game and the start of the next variable display of decorative symbols, a combination representing a loss such as "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5" shown in FIG. 15 (23') is used. It may be displayed. In FIG. 15 (23'), the operation at the start of fluctuation is performed by combining decorative symbols such as "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5". By doing so, the combination of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed before the jackpot game is started (“Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7” shown in FIG. 15 (16)) and the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed. A combination of a combination (“decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” shown in FIG. 15 (17)) and a decorative symbol when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (at the start time or immediately after the start) (FIG. It becomes different from "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5") shown in 15 (23'). In the example shown in FIG. 15 (23'), the decorative symbols of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are different, so that the player does not have to misunderstand that he has hit the jackpot again.

It should be noted that the combination of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed before the big hit game is started (“decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” shown in FIG. 15 (16)) and the combination of the decorative symbols confirmed and displayed (FIG. A combination of the "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" shown in 15 (17) and the decorative symbol at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (at the start time or immediately after the start) (FIG. 15 (23). Even if the "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5") shown in') is different, the mini symbol and the fourth symbol are the final display before the jackpot game is started and the next decoration. The display should be the same as when the variable display of the symbol is started (start time or immediately after the start from the start time).

Subsequently, a modified example of the progress example of the game shown in FIGS. 14 to 15 will be described.

FIG. 15 (3') is in the same state as in FIG. 14 (3), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display is performed with three zone entry symbols of the decoration 12 aligned.

In the following FIG. 15 (5'), the fusuma image fs appears from the left and right of the display screen in the state where the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 continues, that is, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol continues. are doing. Then, an animation in which the sliding doors are closed is displayed while the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern continues.

When the sliding doors are completely closed as shown in FIG. 15 (6'), the definite display of the special figure 2 on the second special figure display device 214 is started, and the special figure 2 is displayed in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. The fourth symbol of FIG. 2 is stopped and displayed by "x" indicating the disconnection, and "256" is stopped and displayed on the mini symbol. The display of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the fusuma image fs and is not visible.

FIG. 15 (7') is in the same state as in FIG. 14 (7), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sliding doors start to open and the stopped display "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6" begins to be seen. .. In addition, "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" may begin to appear.

As described above, the temporary stop display of "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" may be terminated in a state where the display of the decorative pattern is invisible (difficult to see). In other words, the definite display or the definite display of the decorative symbol on the special symbol display device may be started in a state where the decorative symbol cannot be seen (a state in which it is difficult to see). Then, when the display of the decorative pattern becomes visible, the display may be different from the temporary stop display. It should be noted that not only the temporary stop display of "decoration 12" but also other decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 11", "decoration 13", etc.) are similarly invisible (difficult to see). good.

Blackout (FIG. 12 (3)), wipe effect (FIGS. 12 (10) to (12)), and fusuma image fs animation (FIG. 14 (5) to 12) are used to make the decorative pattern invisible. Although the figure (7)) and the effect display are taken as examples, the effect of making the decorative pattern invisible is not limited to these.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example in which a power failure occurs during the final display of the decorative symbol, but the power is immediately restored.

FIG. 16 (9-1) is in the same state as in FIG. 12 (9), and a combination of lost decorative patterns such as “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1” is confirmed and displayed. A power failure occurs while this confirmation display is being performed, but the power is restored immediately. FIG. 16 (9-2) shows that a power failure has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power recovery processing (step S111) shown in FIG. 6 is executed, and the character display of "preparing for restoration" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9-3). .. Eventually, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 16 (13'), the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbol. The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 16 (13') is operated at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of power restoration in FIG. 16 (13') is different from the combination of decorative symbols (“Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1”) that was confirmed and displayed at the time of power interruption, and the power is cut off. It is also different from the combination of decorative symbols (combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 12 (13)) at the time of starting the variation display of the next decorative symbol when the above does not occur. The combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" corresponds to the combination of initial symbols and is always displayed at the time of power restoration. This combination of initial symbols is displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols is started. It should be noted that the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started.

Further, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that was the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12. Is also the default display mode. In addition, the stage has not been changed, and the character YM1 of the lord and the display YM2 of the character different for each type of decorative pattern are not displayed.

Note that FIG. 16 (13') shows a scene in which the fluctuation has already started, but the decorative design (here, "decoration 1") is displayed before the next fluctuation starts after the character display of "preparing for return" is completed. -Decoration 2-Decoration 3 "), mini-design (here," 1-2-3 ") and the fourth design shall be displayed for a moment in a recognizable state. That is, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol at the time of power restoration is different from the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 16 (9-1)) which were confirmed and displayed at the time of power interruption, and the electricity is also displayed. It can be said that it is different from the display of the mini symbol and the display of the fourth symbol (the display immediately before FIG. 12 (13)) when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started when the disconnection does not occur.

FIG. 16 (4-1) is in the same state as in FIG. 14 (4), and a combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" is confirmed and displayed. Here, too, the power is cut off while this confirmation display is being performed, but the power is restored immediately. FIG. 16 (4-2) shows that a power failure has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power recovery processing (step S111) shown in FIG. 6 is executed, and the character display of "preparing for restoration" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (4-3). .. Eventually, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 16 (8'), the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbol. The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 16 (8') is operated at the start of variable display. The combination of the decorative symbols at the time of power recovery in FIG. 16 (8') is "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" which is the combination of the above-mentioned initial symbols. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols ("Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3") when the power is restored and the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started is the combination of the decorative symbols that was confirmed and displayed at the time of power failure ("Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3"). Unlike "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12"), the combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 14 (8) when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol when the power failure does not occur ("Decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12"). It is also different from decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6 "). It should be noted that the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started.

Further, also in FIG. 16 (8'), the variable icon h0 in the default display mode and the hold icons h21 and h22 in the default display mode are displayed. In addition, the zone production itself is not performed, and the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state is displayed.

Note that FIG. 16 (8') shows a scene in which the fluctuation has already started, but the decorative design (here, "decoration 1") is displayed before the next fluctuation starts after the character display of "preparing for return" is completed. -Decoration 2-Decoration 3 "), mini-design (here," 1-2-3 ") and the fourth design shall be displayed for a moment in a recognizable state. That is, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol at the time of power restoration is different from the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (display in FIG. 16 (4-1)) which were confirmed and displayed at the time of power interruption, and the electricity is also displayed. It can be said that it is different from the display of the mini symbol and the display of the fourth symbol (the display immediately before FIG. 14 (8)) when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started when the disconnection does not occur.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the initial symbols is "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", but the combination of the initial symbols is not limited to this combination, and other combinations may be used. However, a combination that reminds us of a big hit is not preferable, and it is desirable to use a combination that cannot be displayed on the variable display.

According to the above description
"A game table provided with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208] capable of displaying a decorative symbol variable display for variable display of a decorative symbol.
The display means is a decorative symbol confirmation display that displays the decorative symbol in a confirmable state [for example, a display when the display of the decorative symbol disguise display starts, a display in the operation at the start of the variable display, and a decorative symbol disguise display. Temporary stop display, stop display (confirmed display) that is displayed after the decorative pattern disguise display is completed, display that combines the temporary stop display and the confirmed display] is executed.
The decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display may differ from the decorative symbol confirmation display when the next decorative symbol variation display is started [for example, FIGS. 12 (2) and (4)). , FIG. 12 (9) and FIG. (13), FIG. 13 (22) and FIG. (24), FIG. 14 (4) and FIG. (8), FIG. 15 (17) and FIG. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, if the decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display is a decorative symbol of a pattern, when the next decorative symbol variation display is started, the player is given a decoration of the pattern. You don't have to give the misunderstanding that you got a big hit by the design. In addition, if the decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display is a decorative symbol representing a big hit, the player is misunderstood that the big hit is made again when the next decorative symbol variation display is started. No need.

The display of the decorative symbol may be a display by a combination of the decorative symbols. Further, the decorative pattern may be a number, a symbol, or a pattern.

The decorative symbol confirmation display after the decorative symbol variation display is started may be a display suggesting the result of the lottery.

The decorative symbol confirmation display after the decorative symbol variation display is started may be entirely included in the decorative symbol variation display, may be partially included in the decorative symbol variation display, or may be included in the decorative symbol variation display. However, it may be included in the stop display of the decorative symbol that is started following the decorative symbol variation display.

"The difference between the decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display and the decorative symbol confirmation display when starting the next decorative symbol variation display is the type of decorative symbol [for example, decoration 1 to decoration 13]. Is the same, and the display mode [for example, the presence / absence of the character display YM2] may not be different, but the type of the decorative symbol may be different. ”The type of the decorative symbol referred to here is a type representing a number. It may be the type of symbol, or the type of pattern.

The display in which the decorative symbol can be confirmed by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol is included in the decorative symbol confirmation display. However, if the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbol disappears or disappears, it is not included in the decorative symbol confirmation display.

also,
"The decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display may be the same as the decorative symbol confirmation display when the next decorative symbol variation display is started [for example, the same figure (17) as in FIG. 13 (16). ), FIG. 14 (11) and the same figure (12), FIG. 15 (17) and the same figure (23)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

"When the display means recovers from a power failure while displaying the decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display, a predetermined display (initial display) as the decorative symbol confirmation display [for example, FIG. 16 ( 13') and the combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" shown in the same figure (8')] may be performed. That is, the first display of the decorative symbol, which is the decorative symbol confirmation display after the decorative symbol variation display is started [for example, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" in FIG. 12 (9) or FIG. 14 (4). "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12"] and the second display of the decorative pattern, which is the decorative pattern confirmation display when the next decorative pattern variation display is started [for example, "Decoration 5-" in FIG. 12 (13). It may be different from "Decoration 4-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6" in FIG. 14 (8). If the power is restored during the display, as the decorative symbol confirmation display, a third display different from the first display and the second display [for example, "decoration 1-decoration" in FIG. 16 (13'). 2-Decoration 3 "or" Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3 "] in FIG. 16 (8') may be displayed. "
"The first decoration is when the first decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol confirmation display when starting the next decorative symbol variation display are different. The display time of the first decorative symbol confirmation display [for example, the period from FIG. 12 (8) to FIG. 12 (12) is longer than when the symbol confirmation display and the second decorative symbol confirmation display are the same. The period from FIG. 12 (15) to FIG. 13 (16) is longer than the period from FIG. 14 (3) to FIG. (7), and the period from FIG. 14 (10) to FIG. ] May be long. "
Further, the decorative symbol confirmation display after the decorative symbol variation display is started may be a temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbol or a final stop display (confirmed display) of the decorative symbol. Alternatively, the display may be from the start of the display of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol to the end of the display of the main stop. The display time of the temporary stop display of the decorative design may differ. For example, it may be 0 seconds or the display time may be 1 second or more and 10 seconds or less. On the other hand, the display time of the display of the main stop of the decorative pattern may be constant. However, the display of the main stop of the decorative symbol may be short in the case of a specific first display (for example, a display for notifying a small hit), or a specific second display (for example, a display for notifying a big hit). It may be long in the case of a display in which an effect such as a stage transition or a zone change is performed).

also,
"The display means also has a different symbol variable display [for example, a fourth symbol (a notification area during symbol change in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284), a mini symbol] that variablely displays another symbol different from the decorative symbol. It ’s feasible and it ’s feasible.
The display means executes a separate symbol confirmation display [for example, a display immediately before FIGS. 12 (9) to 12 and 13), which displays the separate symbol in a confirmable state. ,
Another symbol confirmation display after starting the separate symbol variation display [for example, the fourth symbol or mini symbol in FIGS. 12 (9) to 12]] and another symbol when the next separate symbol variation display is started. It is the same as the confirmation display [for example, the fourth symbol or the mini symbol immediately before FIG. 12 (13)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

"The first display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol confirmation display after starting the decorative symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed in the separate symbol confirmation display after starting the separate symbol variation display [for example, decoration 11]. -Decoration 13 or pseudo-ream pattern (decorative pattern described as "NEXT")] may be used. "
In addition, the display of another symbol (separate symbol variation display, separate symbol confirmation display) may be a display by a combination of different symbols, or may be a display by one different symbol. Further, the separate symbol may be a number or a symbol.

Further, the display of the separate symbol (separate symbol variation display, separate symbol confirmation display) may be a display displayed by other than the display means. For example, it may be a second display means (liquid crystal display device or lamp) dedicated to another symbol, or it may be a sub-display means when the display means is used as the main display means.

Next, the event look-ahead notice executed after the end of the loss reach effect will be described.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the event look-ahead notice step by step. In this example, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

In FIG. 17 (1), the symbol variation display is performed in the first special symbol display device 212, and the decoration symbol variation display is also performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (1), the variable icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the three hold icons h11 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. ~ H13 is displayed. These three hold icons h11 to h13 are also the default display modes.

In the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 17 (1), the hold icon change notice described later and the zone effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 15 may be executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (2), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1” is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the following FIG. 17 (3), “decoration 5” is displayed. -The combination of the lost decorative patterns such as "Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is confirmed and displayed.

Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 17 (1) to 17 (2) is a normal variation, and the time length of the decorative symbol variation display is shorter than the normal variation (for example, 5 seconds). The period of the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is shorter in the shortened fluctuation than in the normal fluctuation. Further, the shortened variation includes an ultra-shortened variation in which the period of the temporary stop display is 0 seconds. Further, in the shortened variation, the operation at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed.

In FIG. 17 (4), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. In addition, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. Further, the icon that has been the second hold icon h12 has become the first hold icon h11. The display mode of the newly designated first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the green display mode at the time of shift movement, and the hold icon change notice has been started. This hold icon change notice is a kind of look-ahead notice that suggests that the hold represented by the hold icon whose display mode has changed may be a big hit in the symbol change display that starts after being digested. The expectation of the jackpot differs depending on the display mode, and the expectation of the jackpot is higher in the green display mode than in the default display mode. The execution start timing of the hold icon change notice may be when the hold is increased or when the shift is moved, but the period during which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol are performed. The hold icon change notice will not start during the period. If there is a hold increase during these periods, the hold icon change notice is given at the time of shift movement.

In FIG. 17 (5), there is a ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings in the special drawing 1 is increased to 3, and the holding icon h13 of the third eye is additionally displayed. The notice of change of the hold icon is also started when the hold icon is increased here, and the display mode of the increased third hold icon h13 is the green display mode. In addition, button notice, which is a kind of normal notice, has also started. In the button notice, the image related to the effect button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, an image urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period is displayed. More specifically, a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136, a meter display 136b that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period, and a character display 136c that prompts the user to press the button are displayed. In this example, the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period. When the effect button 136 is pressed, the upper effect device 2 located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208 descends to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button notice, the expectation of a big hit differs depending on how far the upper effect device 2 descends, and the larger the upper effect device 2 descends, the higher the expectation of a big hit. In FIG. 17 (6), the upper effect device 2 is slightly lowered in the state where the decorative symbol is rapidly changed in all of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the following FIG. 17 (7), the upper effect device 2 rises to the initial position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily stops and displays "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8" which is a combination of lost decorative symbols. ing. Then, in FIG. 17 (8), "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 8" is confirmed and displayed.

In FIG. 17 (9), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 17 (9) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has also been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was in the green display mode, has become the variable icon h0 in the same green display mode, and this time, a normal notice has been given. become.

In FIG. 17 (10), the decorative symbol variation display is a downward high-speed variation.

In FIG. 17 (11), the reach effect is started, and "decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started.

In FIG. 17 (12), the normal reach does not develop into the super reach, and the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the same figure (13) following FIG. 17 (12), the event look-ahead notice is given while the temporary stop display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is continued. There is. Temporary stop of the combination of the lost decorative symbols when the reach is established During the period of display (Fig. 17 (12) to (13)), the temporary stop of the combination of the lost decorative symbols when the reach is not established. It is longer than the display period (Fig. 17 (2)). Further, the event look-ahead notice in FIG. 17 (13) is an animation display js in which a character riding a motorcycle appears and is chanted as revenge. The event look-ahead notice in this example is a notice of an event that occurs in any one of the one or a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays currently suspended to start, and is a definite display of the jackpot symbol, that is, In some cases, a big hit is announced, and in other cases, a reach pattern with a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach pattern performed this time is announced. Here, since it was a normal reach stop, it is foretold that one of the two holds will develop into a super reach or a special super reach with a symbol variation display that is started after the hold is digested. In addition to the event notice, the event look-ahead notice may also notify the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be notified depending on the type of animation display js. Further, instead of notifying the event, only the expected degree of the big hit may be notified. In addition, even if the event look-ahead notice is executed, it may not develop into a super reach or a special super reach (so-called Gase notice).

Further, the notice of change of the hold icon by the second hold icon h12 is continued.

In FIG. 17 (14), a definite display of a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is performed.

In FIG. 17 (15), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 17 (15) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Further, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was the default display mode, has become the variable icon h0, which is also the default display mode.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 17 step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (16) following from FIG. 17 (15), the decorative symbol variation display is a high-speed downward variation.

In FIG. 18 (17), there are two incoming balls in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is increased to 3, and the second holding icon h12 and the third holding icon h13 are added. It is displayed. Further, the reach effect is started, and "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. In the following FIG. 18 (18), as the event look-ahead notice, the super (SP) reach is developed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (19) displays an animation showing the defeat of the lord by the enemy samurai without developing into a special super reach, and in the center of the display screen, "decoration 4" is displayed. -Decoration 6-Decoration 4 "is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of lost decorative patterns. In the figure (20) following FIG. 18 (19), the event look-ahead notice is given while the temporary stop display of the combination of the lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is continued. ing. During the period of temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when it develops to the super reach (Fig. 18 (19) to (20) of the same figure), the temporary stop of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when the reach is not established is provisional. It is longer than the stop display period (Fig. 17 (2)), and the temporary stop display period (Fig. 17 (12) to the same) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when the reach is established but does not develop into super reach. It is longer than Fig. (13)). The event look-ahead notice in FIG. 18 (20) is the same animation display js as the event look-ahead notice in FIG. 17 (13). The event look-ahead notice of the super reach stop in FIG. 18 (20) is a symbol variation display that is started when one of the three holds is exhausted, and the special super has a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach. It is foretold that it will develop into reach.

In FIG. 18 (21), a definite display of a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is performed.

Even in the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 17 (15) to 18 (20), the hold icon change notice and the zone effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 15 may be executed.

In FIG. 18 (22), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decoration symbol variation display is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design shown in FIG. 18 (22) is operated at the start of variable display. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Further, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was the green display mode, has become the variable icon h0, which is also the green display mode. Further, the icon that has been the second hold icon h12 has become the first hold icon h11. The display mode of the newly changed first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode at the time of shift movement, and the hold icon change notice which is a look-ahead notice has been started. There is. The look-ahead notice by the hold icon in the red display mode has a higher expectation of a big hit than the look-ahead notice by the hold icon in the green display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (23), the decorative symbol variation display is a high-speed downward variation.

In FIG. 18 (24), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (24) in which the reach state is established, the display sf3 of the dialogue notice, which is a kind of the normal notice, is also displayed. In the following FIG. 18 (25), it develops into a super reach, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (26), a red flash display fl1 indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed, and the event pre-reading notice in FIG. 18 (20) is developed into a special super (SPSP) reach. are doing. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (27), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" which is temporarily stopped and displayed from the red flash display fl1 is provided. In the same figure (28) that appears and follows, the temporary stop display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" continues. After that, in FIG. 18 (29), the wipe effect is started as the revival effect, and in FIG. 18 (30) when the wipe-in is completed, the display of the decorative symbol is not visible due to the wipe display wp.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 18 step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (31) following from FIG. 18 (30), the wipe-out has started, and a part of the decorative symbol can be seen. In the following FIG. 19 (32), the wipe effect is finished, and the combination of the lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" is still temporarily stopped and displayed, and the revival effect has ended in failure. Further, in FIG. 19 (32), the event look-ahead notice is executed by displaying the animation display js. Here, it is assumed that the execution was performed for the hold to be digested next, and in the variable display in which the event look-ahead notice was executed, it is foretold that a big hit will be made because the special super reach was executed.

It should be noted that the wipe effect may be started in FIG. 18 (28) before the start.

In FIG. 19 (33), a definite display of a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" is performed.

During the period of temporary stop display (Fig. 18 (28) to Fig. 19 (32)) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when it develops to the special super reach, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when the reach is not established It is longer than the temporary stop display period (Fig. 17 (2)), and the temporary stop display period (Fig. 17 (12)- It is longer than the figure (13)). Furthermore, during the period of temporary stop display (Fig. 18 (28) to Fig. 19 (32)) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when it develops to the special super reach, even if it develops to the super reach, it becomes the special super reach. May be longer than the period of temporary stop display (FIG. 18 (19) to FIG. (20)) of the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss when it does not develop.

In FIG. 19 (34), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. Further, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was in the red display mode, has become the variable icon h0 in the red display mode, and the normal notice has started.

In FIG. 19 (35), the button notice, which is a kind of the normal notice, is also started, and the button image 136a, the meter display 136b, and the character display 136c of "press" are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. The effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, and the upper effect device 2 descends from the initial position to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 19 (36), the upper effect device 2 is shown in FIG. 17 (6) in a state where high-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbol is performed in any of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. It has fallen more than at the time of, and the expectation of a big hit is high. Eventually, in FIG. 19 (37), the reach effect is started, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. In the following FIG. 19 (38), it develops into a super reach, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39), a rainbow-colored flash display fl2 indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed, which has developed into a special super (SPSP) reach. The rainbow color has a higher expectation of a big hit than red, and is a color indicating that the big hit is confirmed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (40), a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" that is temporarily stopped and displayed appears from the rainbow-colored flash display fr2. However, in the following figure (41), the wipe effect is started as the revival effect. In FIG. 19 (42) where the wipe-in is completed, the display of the decorative pattern is once completely invisible due to the wipe display wp. When the wipe-in is completed, the wipe-out starts and a part of the decorative pattern becomes visible. The combination of the decorative symbols of "b" (3R normal jackpot) is displayed as a temporary stop, and the revival production is successful. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (44), the combination of the decorative symbols of the normal jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

The revival effect may be an effect that always occurs when the special super reach ends, or may or may not occur. In addition, the display content of the part that has begun to be seen by the wipeout becomes difficult to see due to the effect display ef (see FIG. 14 (7)) such as light emission, and when the wipeout is completed, the effect display ends and the display content can be visually recognized. May be. Alternatively, high-speed fluctuation due to re-variation is performed during the wipe effect, and it is difficult to confirm the decorative pattern from the part that has begun to be seen by the wipe-out. The display may be made. Further, the wipe effect is not performed, and the high-speed fluctuation of the re-variation may be performed as the revival effect.

In the game progress examples shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the animation display js of the event look-ahead notice having the same effect mode is executed for each lost reach with a different reach pattern (reach type), and the next fluctuation is the target of the look-ahead notice. Although it was fluctuating, in this way, the animation display js of the event look-ahead notice is not only performed each time by the continuous variable display of the decorative pattern, but also may be performed once. In this case, the change two ahead may be the target change of the look-ahead notice, the change three ahead may be the target change of the look-ahead notice, or the change four ahead may be the target change of the look-ahead notice. be. If there are two or more holds, the player does not know which change is the target change of the look-ahead notice.

Further, FIG. 19A summarizes the relationship between the execution reach pattern of the event look-ahead notice and the event (suggested content) subject to the event look-ahead notice.

When the event look-ahead notice is executed in the normal reach loss, the event look-ahead notice is an effect of notifying that the super (SP) reach or the special super (SPSP) reach will be performed.

When the event look-ahead notice is executed due to the super (SP) reach loss, the event look-ahead notice is an effect of notifying that the special super (SPSP) reach will be performed.

If the event look-ahead notice is executed due to a loss while developing to the special super (SPSP) reach, the event look-ahead notice will be an effect of notifying the confirmation of the big hit.

In the case of normal reach loss, the event look-ahead notice may not be executed.

In addition, if the pattern of the reach effect in the special figure low probability state (non-probability change game state) is lost, the event look-ahead notice is not executed, and if the pattern of the reach effect in the special figure high probability state is lost, the event is lost. The event look-ahead notice may be executed, or conversely, in the case of a loss in the reach effect pattern in the special figure high probability state, the event look-ahead notice is not executed and the special figure low probability state (non-probability change). In the case of a loss in the reach effect pattern in the game state), the event look-ahead notice may be executed.

In addition, if the pattern of the reach effect in the low probability state of the normal map (non-time saving game state) is lost, the event look-ahead notice is not executed, and if the reach effect in the high probability state of the normal figure is lost, the event look-ahead is performed. The notice may be executed, or conversely, in the case of a loss in the reach production in the normal figure high probability state, the event look-ahead notice is not executed and in the normal figure low probability state (non-time saving game state). In the case of a loss in the reach effect pattern, the event look-ahead notice may be executed.

In addition, in the case of a loss in the reach effect pattern in the advantageous state (special figure high probability state, normal figure high probability state, special figure high and low probability state, normal figure low probability state, special figure low probability state, normal figure high probability state), If the event look-ahead notice is not executed and the pattern of the reach effect in the normal state (special figure low probability state, normal figure low probability state) is lost, the event look-ahead notice may be executed, or conversely. , In the case of a loss in the reach effect pattern in the normal state (special figure low probability state normal figure low probability state), the event look-ahead notice is not executed and the advantageous state (special figure high probability state normal figure high probability state, special In the case of a loss in the pattern of the reach effect in the high-low probability state of the figure, the low-probability state of the normal figure, and the high-probability state of the special figure), the event look-ahead notice may be executed.

Further, the event look-ahead effect may not be a suggestion of reach but a suggestion of the degree of expectation of a big hit (see FIG. 20). Further, instead of the event look-ahead effect, an effect suggesting a set value changed in the setting change process of step S117 of FIG. 6 may be executed.

Furthermore, even if reach loss occurs, the event look-ahead notice is not always executed, and may not be executed. For example, even if a normal reach loss occurs and the next fluctuation develops into a super reach, the event look-ahead notice may not be executed. Alternatively, the variation display of the decorative symbol in a predetermined state (for example, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the b time-saving gaming state (during play time), or the variation of the last decorative symbol in which the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state is maintained). In the display, etc.), even if a reach loss occurs, the event look-ahead notice may not be executed.

Further, when the normal reach loss occurs and the event look-ahead notice is executed, the event look-ahead notice may be repeatedly executed until the change subject to the event look-ahead notice. That is, the same event look-ahead notice may be executed for each fluctuation (for each temporary stop display period).

Further, the event look-ahead notice is a specific display of the animation display js in which a character riding a motorcycle appears and is chanted as revenge, but it may be a specific sound or a specific light emission.

Subsequently, a modified example of the progress example of the game shown in FIGS. 17 to 19 will be described.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modified example of the event look-ahead notice step by step.

FIG. 20 (19') is in the same state as FIG. 18 (19), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows an animation showing the defeat of the enemy samurai without developing into a special super reach. It is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the following FIG. 20 (20'), the event mixing notice is started instead of the event look-ahead notice. In this event mixing notice, a single picture ec of the character that grabs the player's line of sight is displayed on the entire display screen, and if the character emits a line, a revival effect is performed or it is on hold. It becomes rich that there is a big hit. That is, the notice that the revival effect will be performed corresponds to the event normal notice, and the notice that there is a big hit in the hold corresponds to the event look-ahead notice. In the single picture ec displayed in FIG. 20 (20'), the line "Still still" is emitted, and in FIG. 20 (21'), the wipe effect is started as the revival effect and the wipe-in is completed. At 20 (22'), the single picture ec cannot be seen due to the wipe display wp. Next, a wipe-out is performed, and in FIG. 20 (23'), the wipe effect is completed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (23'), a combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 4-decoration 13-decoration 4" (3R normal jackpot of "special figure b") is temporarily stopped. The revival production has been successful. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (24'), the combination of the decorative symbols of the normal jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 20 (19'') is also in the same state as FIG. 18 (19), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows an animation in which the lord is defeated by an enemy samurai without developing into a special super reach. Is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the following FIG. 20 (20 ″), the event look-ahead notice is started. This event look-ahead notice is not a look-ahead notice for any of the holds, but a look-ahead notice in which the fluctuations subject to the notice are determined. That is, if the character is in a pose with his thumb up, it will be a pre-reading notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the next fluctuation, and if the character issues a line, it will be a pre-reading notice that the big hit will be confirmed in the next fluctuation. become. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (20 ″) displays a display cp of the pose in which the character puts his thumb up.

In FIG. 20 (21 ″), a definite display of a combination of lost decorative patterns such as “decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 4” is performed.

In FIG. 20 (22 ″), the next variation, which was the subject of the event look-ahead notice, is started, first, the symbol variation display in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and in the following figure (23 ″). , The variable display of decorative patterns has started. In this next variation, the reach state is established in FIG. 20 (24''), it develops into super reach in FIG. 20 (25''), and in the figure (26''), “decoration 4-decoration 13-decoration”. The combination of the decorative symbols of the normal big hit such as "4" is confirmed and displayed.

According to the above description
"A look-ahead effect means for executing a plurality of types of look-ahead effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] and
A notice effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] for executing a notice effect [for example, button notice, dialogue notice] in the currently performed symbol change display, and
It is a game table equipped with
The look-ahead effect of one of the plurality of types of look-ahead effects is the first look-ahead effect [for example, hold icon change notice, zone effect].
One type of look-ahead effect among the plurality of types of look-ahead effects is a second look-ahead effect [for example, event look-ahead notice].
The look-ahead effect means may execute the first look-ahead effect in parallel with the advance notice effect [for example, the look-ahead notice and the dialogue notice by the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 14 (9). Display sf1, display of look-ahead notice and dialogue notice by empty zone in FIG. 14 (13) sf2],
The look-ahead effect means may not execute the second look-ahead effect in parallel with the advance notice effect [for example, FIGS. 17 (13), 18 (20), 18 (28) to the same. In FIG. (32), the advance notice effect is not executed, and only the event look-ahead advance notice is executed],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the second look-ahead notice can be made conspicuous.

Although the advance notice effect is a so-called normal advance notice, a look-ahead effect other than the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the advance notice effect.

Further, the advance notice effect, the first look-ahead effect, and the second look-ahead effect are displays, but the display is not limited to the display, and may be a sound, light emission, a movable body operation, or the like.

also,
In the first period [for example, the period from the start of the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol to the start of the final display of the decorative symbol], the first look-ahead effect [for example, hold] The execution of the icon change notice] is not started [for example, if there is a hold increase in the first period, it is not started but is started at the time of shift movement].
The look-ahead effect means may start executing the second look-ahead effect during the first period [for example, FIGS. 17 (13), 18 (20), 19 (32)). ], A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first period may have a different period length.

also,
"A display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208] capable of performing a variable display of a decorative symbol that variablely displays the display of the decorative symbol is provided.
The decorative symbol variation display may include a suggestion period [for example, a period during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 18 (28) and FIG. 19 (32)]] that suggests the result of the pass / fail determination.
The first period is a period including the suggested period [for example, a period from FIG. 18 (28) to FIG. 19 (32), in which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol cannot be seen (FIG. 18 (29)). )-Including FIG. 19 (31))].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means can execute the stop display of the decorative symbol following the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the first period is the period during which the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (for example, the figure). 19 (33) may be a period that does not include the period of definite display of the decorative pattern). It can be said that the stop display of the decorative symbol also suggests the result of the hit / fail determination, but the stop display of the decorative symbol can be said to notify the result of the hit / fail determination.

Further, the first period may be a period including a period in which the display of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (shaking display) is displayed. More specifically, in the first period, after the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbol starts to be displayed, the temporary stop display disappears once, and then the temporary stop display is visible again. It may be a period until the display of the main stop (confirmed display) is displayed. Alternatively, during the first period, after the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbol begins to be displayed, the temporary stop display is temporarily invisible, and the temporary stop display is not visible again. It may be a period until the stop display (confirmed display) is displayed. That is, the first period may be a period from the start of displaying the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative symbol to the display of the main stop display (confirmed display).

also,
"The decorative pattern variation display has a plurality of types of variation display patterns [for example, variation patterns including reach patterns].
The second look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests what will happen in the decorative symbol variation display that is started after this [for example, what kind of reach pattern will be executed or whether it will be a big hit]. ,
The second look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests different contents depending on the pattern [for example, FIG. 19 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

"The pattern of one of the plurality of types is the first pattern [for example, the variation pattern in which the reach is not established], and the pattern of one of the plurality of types is the second. [For example, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach], and the second pattern has a longer suggestion period than the first pattern [for example, FIGS. 17 (12) to 17 (12) rather than FIG. 17 (2). FIG. 13 (13) is longer], the look-ahead effect means does not perform the second look-ahead effect in the first pattern [for example, FIG. 17 (2)], and the look-ahead effect. The effect means may execute the second look-ahead effect in the second pattern [for example, FIG. 18 (20)], and the look-ahead effect means may also perform the second look-ahead effect in the first pattern. Even in the pattern of FIG. 17 (1), the first look-ahead effect [for example, the hold icon change notice] may be executed [for example, the hold icon change notice may be executed in FIG. 17 (1), and FIG. 17 (12). -In the same figure (13), the hold icon change notice is executed by the second hold icon h12]. ”Furthermore, the second pattern is a reach effect (two same decorative symbols are confirmed). It is a pattern of a variable display effect in which the third decorative symbol cannot be confirmed in a state where it can be performed, and the first pattern is a non-reach effect (two different decorative symbols can be confirmed). It may be a pattern of variable display) in which the third decorative symbol cannot be confirmed in the state.

"The pattern of one of the plurality of types of patterns is the pattern of the first reach effect, and the pattern of the variation display of one type of the patterns of the plurality of types of variation display is the second pattern. It is a pattern of reach effect, and the look-ahead effect means may not execute the second look-ahead effect in the pattern of the first reach effect, and the look-ahead effect means is the second reach effect. In the pattern of, the second look-ahead effect may be executed. ”Furthermore, the pattern of the second reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pattern of the first reach effect. It is a pattern of high reach production. For example, the second reach effect pattern may be a super reach or special super reach pattern, and the first reach effect pattern may be a normal reach pattern. Further, the second reach effect pattern is a reach effect pattern in the special figure high probability state (probability change game state), and the first reach effect pattern is the special figure low probability state (non-probability change game state). It may be a pattern of reach production in. Or conversely, the second reach effect pattern is a reach effect pattern in the special figure low probability state, and the first reach effect pattern is a reach effect pattern in the special figure high probability state. good. Further, the second reach effect pattern is a reach effect pattern in the normal figure high probability state (time saving game state), and the first reach effect pattern is the normal figure low probability state (non-time saving game state). It may be a pattern of reach production in. Or, conversely, the pattern of the second reach effect is the pattern of the reach effect in the low probability state of the normal figure, and the pattern of the first reach effect is the pattern of the reach effect in the high probability state of the normal figure. May be. Further, the second reach effect pattern is reach in an advantageous state (special figure high probability state, normal figure high probability state, special figure high and low probability state, normal figure low probability state, special figure low probability state, normal figure high probability state). It is an effect pattern, and the first reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a normal state (special figure low probability state, normal figure low probability state). Alternatively, conversely, the second reach effect pattern may be the reach effect pattern in the normal state, and the first reach effect pattern may be the reach effect pattern in the advantageous state.

"The pre-reading effect means has the same effect mode [for example, a character riding a motorcycle appears and is called revenge", although the suggested content [for example, the event subject to the pre-reading notice] differs depending on the type of the pattern. Animation display js] The second look-ahead effect may be feasible. "That is, the second look-ahead effect has different suggestions depending on the type of the pattern, but the effect mode is the same. You may.

"In the look-ahead effect means, when the reach effect is performed and it is suggested that the result of the hit / fail determination is lost in the suggestion period, the reach effect higher than the reach effect is performed as the second look-ahead effect (the second look-ahead effect). For example, a look-ahead effect that suggests that a reach effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect or a reach effect with a longer effect time than the reach effect) is executed, and the highest reach is performed. When the effect is performed and it is suggested that the result of the pass / fail judgment is lost in the suggestion period, the look-ahead suggesting that the decorative symbol variation display that makes a big hit in the hold is executed as the second look-ahead effect. It may be the one that performs the production. "
"The pre-reading effect means may execute the second pre-reading effect when the reach effect is performed and it is suggested that the result of the pass / fail determination is a loss in the suggestion period, but it is predetermined. In the symbol variation display of the state (for example, the symbol variation display in the play time, the last symbol variation display in which the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state is maintained, etc.), a reach effect is performed and a hit / fail judgment is made in the suggested period. Even if it is suggested that the result is a loss, the second look-ahead effect may not be executed. "
Next, the accessory vibration effect will be described. There are two types of effects, the accessory vibration effect A and the accessory vibration effect B, in the accessory vibration effect, which is a normal notice. Both vibration effects are effects in which a common accessory (upper effect device 2) vibrates.

FIG. 21A is a diagram showing a table relating to the accessory vibration effect A. The accessory vibration effect A may be performed during the execution of the super (SP) reach, or may be performed during the execution of the special super (SPSP) reach. As shown in this table, when the character vibration effect A is performed during the super (SP) reach, the expectation of the jackpot is 40%, and it is performed during the special super (SPSP) reach. The expectation of a big hit is 55%. As described above, the accessory vibration effect A is an effect of a normal notice in which the expectation of a big hit differs depending on the execution timing. Further, in the accessory vibration effect A, an image related to the vibrating accessory (upper effect device 2) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the effect (vibration) starts.

FIG. 21B is a diagram showing a table relating to the accessory vibration effect B. The accessory vibration effect B may be performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the super (SP) reach is performed, or may be performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the special super (SPSP) reach is performed. In the above-mentioned character vibration effect A, only one execution timing is prepared for one decorative symbol variation display, whereas in the accessory vibration effect B, execution in one decorative symbol variation display is prepared. There are multiple timings available. Then, the degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the execution timing. That is, in the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the super (SP) reach is performed, when the accessory vibration effect B is performed at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, the expectation of the jackpot is 70%, and the reach state is first. The expectation of a big hit is 35% when it is performed during the reach (before the development of the super reach), and during the super reach (after the development of the super reach and before the temporary stop display of the decorative design). If it is done, the expectation of the jackpot is 45%, and if it is done while the temporary stop display of the combination of decorative symbols representing the loss is displayed (during the execution of the revival production), the expectation of the jackpot is 100%. be. Since the expectation of the big hit is 100%, the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols representing the loss means that the revival effect that finally becomes the big hit is being executed. In addition, in the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the special super (SPSP) reach is performed, the term "during super reach" means that it is after the development of super reach and before the development of special super reach, and is said to be during special super reach. Execution timing has been added. This special super reach is after the development of the special super reach and before the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, and if the character vibration production B is performed during the special super reach, it is a big hit. The expectation is 55%. Further, in the accessory vibration effect B, the vibration period of the vibrating accessory (upper effect device 2) is the same even if the execution timing is different.

In the table shown in FIG. 21, "during reach" may be when the reach is established or when the reach is fluctuating. Further, "during SP reach" may be during the development of super reach or during the fluctuation of super reach. Further, "in SPSP reach" may be during the development of the special super reach or may be during the fluctuation of the special super reach.

Further, the accessory vibration effect B may be executed at a timing when the accessory vibration effect A is not executed. That is, at the start of the change of the decorative symbol, during the reach where the reach state is first established and during the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols representing the loss (during the execution of the revival effect), the accessory vibration effect A is not executed. This is the execution timing of the object vibration effect B.

Further, the accessory vibration effect A and the accessory vibration effect B have the same vibration method (vibration mode), but may be different. For example, while the accessory vibration effect A repeats short vibrations, the accessory vibration effect B may end with one long vibration.

Further, the accessory vibration effect A and the accessory vibration effect B may be an effect in which the lower effect device 3 vibrates instead of the upper effect device 2. Alternatively, the accessory vibration effect A may be an effect in which the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the accessory vibration effect B may be an effect in which the lower effect device 3 vibrates. Further, the effect device that vibrates in the accessory vibration effect A and the accessory vibration effect B may be provided in the front frame door 106.

Further, the expectation of the jackpot shown in FIG. 21 may change depending on the gaming state (for example, the probabilistic gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, the non-probability-changing gaming state, the non-time-saving gaming state, or a combination thereof). It may be the same regardless of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing in stages a case where the accessory vibration effect A is performed and a case where the accessory vibration effect A is not performed. In the example shown in FIG. 22, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

In FIG. 22, the upper effect device 2 is shown above the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the upper effect device 2 was an accessory (see FIGS. 17 (7) and 19 (36)) that descends from the initial position by a button notice, it also performs a vibration effect at the initial position.

FIG. 22 (1) is a scene in which "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" indicating a loss is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 22 (2), the variable display of the decorative design has started. In addition, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that has been the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 22 (2) is an icon in a red display mode.

In FIG. 22 (3), the reach effect is started, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. In the following FIG. 22 (4), it develops into a super (SP) reach, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (5) displays a state in which the lord and the enemy samurai hold each other and face each other, and a vibration effect-related image 2hg related to the upper effect device 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Has been done. This vibration effect-related image 2hg is a tutorial-like image, and includes an arrow display 2hg1 and a character display such as "If you vibrate, you have a great chance" while paying attention to the upper effect device 2. Further, the vibration effect-related image 2hg is an image that attracts the player's attention to the upper effect device 2, and is also an image that attracts the player's attention to the upper effect device 2.

In addition, a suggestion effect suggesting that the vibration effect-related image 2 hg may be displayed may be executed before the vibration effect-related image 2 hg is displayed. The suggestion effect may be a display effect, a sound effect, or a light emission effect. For example, in the case of a display effect, a semi-transparent upward arrow display may be used. Appears, gradually materializes, and finally becomes an arrow display 2hg1. In addition, it may disappear without being materialized. In this case, the vibration effect-related image 2hg is not displayed, and the accessory vibration effect A is not executed either. Further, even if the arrow display 2hg1 is displayed (even if the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed), the upper effect device 2 is noticed and the character display such as "a great chance if it vibrates" is not displayed. 2hg may not be displayed.

In FIG. 22 (6) following from FIG. 22 (5), after the vibration effect related image 2hg disappears, the upper effect device 2 at the initial position starts vibration. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other, and also displays a production display of "big chance" that makes you expect a big hit. The upper effect device 2 continues to vibrate until the super reach effect is completed (until the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed). The accessory vibration effect A by the upper effect device 2 performed here is a normal notice with an expectation of a big hit of 40%. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (7) displays the appearance of the lord winning the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of jackpot decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Is displayed as a temporary stop, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) has been won. The upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 22 (7) continued to vibrate until just before this, but at the timing of FIG. 22 (7), the vibration is terminated and the upper effect device 2 is in a stationary state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (8), the combination of the decorative symbols of the 2R probability variation jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

It should be noted that the vibration of the upper effect device 2 may end before the effect display of "big chance" that makes a big hit expected.

Further, even if the vibration effect-related image 2hg is displayed, the accessory vibration effect A may not be executed. Further, the expectation of a big hit may be higher when the accessory vibration effect A is executed after the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed than when the accessory vibration effect A is not executed. ..

Further, the vibration effect-related image 2hg is displayed at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 22 (2)), and is displayed at the time of super reach development (FIG. 22 (FIG. 22)) as the execution timing of the accessory vibration effect A during super reach. It may vibrate at the timing of 4)) or at the timing after the development of super reach (timing of FIG. 22 (6)). That is, the accessory vibration effect A may start execution at different timings during the super reach or the special super reach.

On the other hand, in FIG. 22 (6') following FIG. 22 (5), after the vibration effect related image 2hg disappears, the upper effect device 2 at the initial position does not start vibration, and the accessory vibration effect A is executed. It is an example that did not exist. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (6') shows the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (7') shows that the lord has been defeated by the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, there is a lost decorative symbol such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". The combination is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (8'), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing another example stepwise following FIG. 22 (3).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (4) following from FIG. 22 (3) has developed into a super (SP) reach. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (5''), which follows, shows how the lord and the enemy samurai are holding each other and facing each other, but the vibration effect-related image 2hg shown in FIG. 22 (5) is displayed. Not.

In FIG. 23 (6 ″), the upper effect device 2 at the initial position is vibrating. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other. In this example, the vibration period of the upper effect device 2 is short, and the upper effect device 2 is stopped before the super reach effect is completed. The character vibration effect performed by the upper effect device 2 corresponds to the character vibration effect B, and is expected to be a big hit even though it is in the same super reach as the character vibration effect A performed in FIG. 22. The degree is a little high. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (6 ″) does not display the effect display of the great chance shown in FIG. 22 (6). Since the vibration effect-related image 2hg is not displayed before the character vibration effect B is executed, the vibration period is shorter than that of the character vibration effect A, and the effect display of a big chance is not displayed, the character vibration effect B is previously displayed. It can be said that it is a normal notice that a player who is familiar with this pachinko machine 100 knows from. On the other hand, it can be said that the accessory vibration effect A is a normal notice that even a player who is not familiar with the pachinko machine 100 can understand.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (7 ″) displays the appearance of the lord winning the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a jackpot decorative symbol such as “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The combination of is displayed as a temporary stop, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8), the combination of the decorative symbols of the 2R probability variation jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing stepwise another example in which the accessory vibration effect B is performed. In this example as well, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

FIG. 24 (1) is a scene in which "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" indicating a loss is stopped and displayed, as in FIG. 22 (1). In FIG. 24 (2), as in FIG. 22 (2), the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is a variable display that develops into a super reach as shown in FIGS. 22 (1) to 22 (4). At the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the accessory vibration effect B is executed. The accessory vibration effect B here is a normal notice that the expectation of a big hit is 70%. In the accessory vibration effect B, the degree of expectation of a big hit is higher at the execution timing at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol than during the reach or the super reach. At the time of disclosure of the variable display of the decorative pattern, it is not known that the reach will be established in the first place, but a player familiar with the pachinko machine 100 has a hot expectation from the start of the fluctuation when the upper effect device 2 vibrates when the variable display is disclosed. Attention will be paid to the variable display of decorative patterns. In FIG. 24 (3), the super reach effect is developed, and in FIG. 24 (4), the combination of the decorative symbols of the probabilistic jackpot such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 24 (3-1) is a state continuing from FIG. 22 (2), the reach effect is started, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. ing. That is, normal reach has started. During this reach, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the accessory vibration effect B is executed. The accessory vibration effect B here is a normal notice with an expectation of a big hit of 35%. In FIG. 24 (3-2), it has developed into a super reach effect, but in FIG. 24 (4'), a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is definitely displayed. ..

FIG. 24 (6-1) is a state continuing from FIG. 23 (5''), the super reach effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (6-1) has an enemy samurai. In the center of the display screen, a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the accessory vibration effect B is executed. The accessory vibration effect B here is a normal notice in which the expectation of a big hit is 100%, and in the following FIG. 24 (6-2), a wipe effect which is a revival effect is started. After the wipe-in shown in FIG. 24 (6-3) is completed, the wipe-out is performed, the wipe effect which is the revival effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (4'') has "decoration 7". -Decoration 13-Decoration 7 "is a definite display of a combination of normal jackpot decorative patterns.

In both the accessory vibration effect A and the accessory vibration effect B described above, the effect was an effect suggesting the expectation of a big hit, but the upper effect device 2 is a vibration effect suggesting the expectation of a big hit. It may be possible to perform a vibration operation different from that of. In the vibration operation irrelevant to the expectation of the jackpot, the strength of the vibration may be weaker than the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A, or may be weaker than the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect B. Alternatively, in the vibration operation irrelevant to the expectation of the jackpot, the vibration time may be shorter than the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A, or may be shorter than the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect B. Further, the vibration operation irrelevant to the expectation of the jackpot may be a notification operation executed when a predetermined number of holds are accumulated. For example, the upper effect device 2 may execute the vibration operation when the number of holdes one step before the hold full tank reaches 3. This vibrating motion suggests a stop.

Subsequently, the button vibration effect in which the effect button 136 vibrates will be described. The button vibration effect is also a normal notice effect, like the accessory vibration effect. Further, as for the button vibration effect, the image related to the effect button 136 is not displayed as in the accessory vibration effect B. This point is different from the button notice in which the button image 136a and the like shown in FIGS. 17 (6) and 19 (35) are displayed.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a table relating to the button vibration effect. The button vibration effect may be executed by a variable display of a decorative pattern in which a reach effect and a pseudo-continuous effect are combined. Even in the case of normal reach, it is executed at the time of the first temporary stop by the pseudo-continuous production (see FIG. 12 (2)), and the expectation of the big hit at this execution timing is 13%.

Further, the button vibration effect is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol on which the super (SP) reach is performed, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol on which the special super (SPSP) reach is performed, as in the accessory vibration effect B. It may be done in. The button vibration effect is also a normal notice in which the expectation of a big hit differs depending on the execution timing. That is, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the super (SP) reach is performed, the expectation of the jackpot is 50% when the button vibration effect is performed at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, and the first time by the pseudo-continuous effect. The expectation of the jackpot is 13% when it is performed at the time of the temporary stop display of, and the expectation of the jackpot is 15% when it is performed at the time of the second temporary stop display by the pseudo-ream effect. The expectation of a big hit is 30% when it is performed at the time of the third temporary stop display by the production, and the expectation of a big hit is 36% when it is performed at the time of the development of super reach. Further, when the temporary stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols representing the loss is performed (during the execution of the revival effect), the expectation of the big hit is 100%. This means that, as with the character vibration effect B, the expectation of a big hit is 100%, which means that a revival effect that will eventually become a big hit is being executed. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the special super reach (SPSP) reach is performed, the execution timing at the time of the development of the special super reach is added. If the button vibration effect is performed during the development of this special super reach, the expectation of a big hit will be 48%.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the button vibration effect step by step. In this example as well, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended. Further, in FIG. 26, an effect button 136 is shown at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 26 (1) to 26 (9) is the same as the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 12 (1) to 12 (9). That is, in FIG. 26 (1), the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 has started. In FIG. 26 (2), the pseudo-ream effect is started, and the pseudo-ream symbol (decorative symbol described as “NEXT”) suggesting the pseudo-ream effect is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the left symbol is displayed. "Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped in the area 208a, and "decoration 7" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the first temporary stop display is performed. FIG. 26 (2) shows that the effect button 136 is vibrating at the time of the first temporary stop display, and the button vibration effect is performed. The expected degree of jackpot of the button vibration effect at this execution timing is 13%. In FIG. 26 (3), the display screen is blacked out, and in FIG. 26 (4), the state immediately before the start of the second variation (re-variation) in the pseudo-continuous production is shown. In FIG. 26 (5), the second variation (re-variation) of the decorative pattern is started.

When the effect button 136 vibrated by the button vibration effect is pressed within a predetermined period, a response display (for example, a character display of "hot") may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 26 (6), the decorative symbol of "decoration 5" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and in FIG. 26 (7), the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Has been done. In the following FIG. 26 (8), the decorative symbol of "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking). (Variable display), and in the figure (9), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is confirmed and displayed.

The effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (e) is the same as the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 13 (18) to (22). That is, in FIG. 26 (a), the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 is started under the stage of the hall, and in the figure (a), the reach state is established, and the right symbol is also displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. "Decoration 2" is also temporarily stopped and displayed in the area 208c. In FIG. 26 (c), it has developed into a super reach. FIG. 26 (c) shows that the effect button 136 is vibrating during the development of Super Reach, and the button vibration effect is performed. The expected degree of jackpot of the button vibration effect at this execution timing is 36%.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (d), an animation showing the lord who won the enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a normal jackpot decoration such as "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2" is displayed. The combination of symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the figure (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the normal jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

In the button vibration effect described above, the image related to the effect button 136 is not displayed, the vibration period is shorter than that of the accessory vibration effect A, and the effect display according to the button vibration effect is not displayed. It can be said that it is a normal notice that a player who is familiar with this pachinko machine 100, who has known the vibration effect for a long time, can understand.

The button vibration effect may be an effect in which the determination button 1903 vibrates instead of the effect button 136.

Further, the effect button 136 may also perform the same vibration operation as the vibration operation irrelevant to the expected degree of jackpot described in the description of the upper effect device 2.

According to the above description
"The first vibration means [for example, the upper effect device 2] capable of executing the first vibration operation [for example, the accessory vibration effect A] and
A display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image [for example, a vibration effect related image 2hg] related to the first vibration means, and a display means.
It is a game table equipped with
The first vibration means can start the execution of the first vibration operation after the first image is displayed [for example, FIG. 22 (6)].
The display means can display a certain image related to the hit / fail determination result [for example, an effect display of "great chance"] after displaying the first image [for example, FIG. 22 (6)].
The first case where the first vibration operation is executed at the first timing [for example, the timing at the time of super reach development in FIG. 22 (4)] after the display of the first image is started, and the first case. There is a second case in which the first vibration operation is executed at a second timing [for example, a timing after the development of super reach (timing in FIG. 22 (6))] later than the first timing.
In the first case, the display means displays the certain image after starting the display of the first image, and even in the second case, after starting the display of the first image, the display means. It displays a certain image [for example, FIG. 22 (6)].
The first vibrating means ends the first vibrating operation before the end of displaying a certain image in either the first case or the second case. And
The first vibration means can execute the second vibration operation [for example, the accessory vibration effect B].
The first vibration operation has a longer vibration time than the second vibration operation [for example, the vibration is continued until the super reach effect is completed (until the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed)]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

also,
"The display means does not display the first image before the execution of the second vibration operation is started [for example, FIG. 23 (6'')].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"There is a third case [for example, FIG. 22 (6')] in which the first vibration operation is not executed even if the display of the first image is started.
In the third case, the display means does not display the certain image after starting the display of the first image [for example, FIG. 22 (6')].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the above description
"The first vibration means [for example, the upper effect device 2] capable of executing the first vibration operation [for example, the accessory vibration effect A] and
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
It is a game table equipped with
The display means starts displaying a first image [for example, a vibration effect related image 2hg] related to the first vibration means before the execution of the first vibration operation is started. , A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it is difficult for the player to overlook the first vibration operation. In addition, the player may advance the game in anticipation of the first vibration operation, and the interest of the game may be improved.

The first vibration operation may be an effect operation or a notification operation.

Further, the first image may be an image that draws attention to the first vibrating means, or may be an image that attracts attention to the first vibrating means.

Further, the display means may start displaying the first image before the execution of the first vibration operation is started and after the reach effect is started [for example. , FIG. 22 (5)].

Further, an effect suggesting that the first image may be displayed before the display of the first image is started (for example, a display effect or a sound effect). It may be a light emission effect). Even if this effect is executed, the first image may not be displayed.

also,
"The display means ends the display of the first image before the execution of the first vibration operation is started [for example, FIG. 22 (5)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The first vibration means is capable of performing the second vibration operation [for example, the accessory vibration effect B].
The display means does not display the first image before the execution of the second vibration operation is started [for example, FIG. 23 (6'')].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, the second vibration operation may be an operation in which the timing of vibration start is different from that of the first vibration operation [for example, at the time of disclosure of fluctuation shown in FIG. 21 (b), during reach, and a loss symbol. During temporary stop], the operation may be different from the first vibration operation.

also,
"The first vibration operation has a longer vibration time than the second vibration operation [for example, the vibration continues until the super reach effect is completed (until the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed)]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The second vibrating means different from the first vibrating means [for example, the effect button 136 and the decision button 1903] are provided.
The second vibration means can execute a third vibration operation [for example, a button vibration effect].
The display means does not display an image related to the second vibration means before the execution of the third vibration operation is started [for example, FIGS. 26 (1) and 26 (a)). None of them are displayed],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

"The first vibration means may not execute the first vibration operation even when the first image is displayed on the display means." Further, the first vibration means. The expectation of a big hit may be higher when the first vibration operation is executed after the image of is displayed than when the first vibration operation is not executed.

"The first vibration means is the first timing [for example, after the first image is displayed on the display means [for example, displayed at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol of FIG. 22 (2)]. When the execution of the first vibration operation is started at the timing at the time of super reach development in FIG. 22 (4), and at the second timing later than the first timing [for example, the timing after the super reach development (for example, the timing after the super reach development). The execution of the first vibration operation may be started at the timing of FIG. 22 (6)]. ”That is, the first vibration means has the first image on the display means. After being displayed, the execution of the first vibration operation may be started at different timings.

"The first vibrating means [for example, the upper effect device 2] is arranged on the door member [for example, the front frame door 106], and can vibrate even when the door member is closed or open. Further, the first vibration means is arranged on the door member, and the door member opens the first vibration operation started in a state where the door member is closed. It may be in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being unsuccessful. Alternatively, the first vibrating means [for example, the upper effect device 2] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member, and is in a state of being open even when the door member is closed. However, it may be vibrable. Further, the first vibration means [for example, the upper effect device 2] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member, and the door member is started in a closed state. The first vibration operation may be continued even when the door member is opened. The second vibrating means [for example, the effect button 136 or the decision button 1903] is arranged on the door member [for example, the door 108 with the ball storage dish], and is in a state of being open even when the door member is closed. However, it may be vibrable. Further, the second vibrating means [for example, the effect button 136 or the decision button 1903] is arranged on the door member [for example, the door 108 with the ball storage plate], and starts in a state where the door member is closed. The first vibration operation may be continued even when the door member is opened. Alternatively, the second vibrating means [for example, the lower effect device 3] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member [for example, the door 108 with a ball storage dish], and is described above. The door member may be vibrable regardless of whether it is closed or open. Further, the second vibrating means [for example, the lower effect device 3] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member [for example, the door 108 with the ball storage plate]. The first vibration operation started with the door member closed may be continued even when the door member is opened.

"The display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208] finishes displaying the first image [for example, the vibration effect related image 2hg], and then displays the characters of the third image [for example," hot ". ] May be started to be displayed. The third image may be a response display to the operation of the first vibration means [for example, the effect button 136].

"The first vibration means [for example, the upper effect device 2] can execute the fourth vibration operation, and the first vibration operation [for example, the accessory vibration effect A] is expected to be a big hit. It is an effect operation that suggests the degree [for example, the expected degree of the jackpot shown in FIG. 21 (a)], and the second vibration operation [for example, the accessory vibration effect B] is also the expected degree of the jackpot [for example, FIG. 21]. It is an effect operation that suggests the expectation degree of the big hit shown in (b)], and the fourth vibration operation does not have to be the effect operation that suggests the expectation degree of the big hit. " The strength of the vibration may be weaker than that of the first vibration operation, or may be weaker than that of the second vibration operation. Alternatively, in the fourth vibration operation, the vibration time may be shorter than the first vibration operation or shorter than the second vibration operation. Further, the fourth vibration operation may be a notification operation executed when a predetermined number of holds are accumulated.

Next, a background effect, which is a normal notice effect similar to the button vibration effect, will be described. Here, the execution (start) timing of the background effect and the expectation of the big hit will be explained.

FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a table for background effect. The background effect may also be executed (started) by the variable display of the decorative pattern, which is a combination of the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. The background effect is not executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol with normal reach, but during the variable display of the decorative symbol with super (SP) reach and the variable display of the decorative symbol with special super (SPSP) reach. It may be executed (started) during. That is, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the super (SP) reach is performed, the expectation of the big hit is 20% when the background effect is performed at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, and the second time by the pseudo-continuous effect. When the temporary stop is displayed, the expectation of the jackpot is 25%, and when it is performed during the super reach, the expectation of the jackpot is 35%. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the special super reach (SPSP) reach is performed, the execution timing during the special super reach is added. If the background effect is performed during this special super reach, the expectation of a big hit will be 40%.

Next, the mini character production will be described. The mini character production includes a production in which the mini character A appears and a production in which the mini character B appears. In addition, there may be an effect in which a different type of mini character appears. The mini character production is also a normal notice production, but the expectation of a big hit is the same even if the appearing mini character changes. However, if the mini character that appears changes, the expectation of the big hit may also change. Further, the execution timing is the same even if the mini character is changed, but the execution timing may be changed if the mini character is changed. Further, the mini character displayed may be changed depending on the effect mode, or the mini character displayed may be changed as a result of the internal lottery regardless of the effect mode.

FIG. 27B is a diagram showing a table relating to the mini character production. This table is common to mini character A and mini character B.

Similar to the character vibration effect, the mini character effect may be performed during the execution of the super (SP) reach or may be performed during the execution of the special super (SPSP) reach. As shown in the table of FIG. 27 (b), in the mini character effect, a plurality of execution timings in one variable display of the decorative symbol are prepared. However, the expectation of a big hit is the same regardless of the execution timing. That is, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the super (SP) reach is performed, even if the mini character effect is executed before the reach state is first established, it is during the super reach (after the development to the super reach). Even if it is performed before the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol) or during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, the expectation of the big hit is 55%. In addition, in the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the special super (SPSP) reach is performed, the term "during super reach" means that it is after the development of super reach and before the development of special super reach, and is said to be during special super reach. Execution timing has been added. This special super reach is after the development of the special super reach and before the temporary stop display of the decorative design. Even if the mini character production is performed during this special super reach, the expectation of a big hit is 55%.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of mini character production step by step. In the example shown in FIG. 28, it is a non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) and left-handed is recommended.

FIG. 28 (1) is a scene in which "decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 3" indicating a loss is stopped and displayed. In the following FIG. 28 (2), the variable display of the decorative design is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (2), a mini character-related image mcg related to the mini character effect is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. This mini-character related image mcg includes a notice that the mini-character production may be started and a tutorial-like character display such as "It will be hot if it appears".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (3), the mini character-related image mcg disappears, and the decorative symbol is rapidly changed in all of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In this state, a part of the mini character Amcr is beginning to be seen above the left edge of the display screen. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (4), the entire mini character Amcr is displayed. This mini character Amcr is a rocket character and is flying to the right.

In FIG. 28 (5), the reach effect is started, and "decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, normal reach has started. The mini character Amcr continues to fly, but is lowering its altitude.

In FIG. 28 (6), it has evolved from normal reach to super reach. Even on the screen that has evolved into Super Reach, the mini character Amcr is displayed, and the mini character Amcr continues to fly. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (7), which follows, shows that the lord and the enemy samurai are holding each other and facing each other, and the mini character Amcr continues to fly, but this time he is raising the altitude.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (8), the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other is displayed, and the mini character Amcr is still displayed. The mini character Amcr that appears before the reach is established in FIG. 28 (3) continues to be displayed until the super reach effect is completed, that is, until the temporary stop display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (9) displays the appearance of the lord winning the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a decorative symbol of a normal jackpot such as "decoration 1-decoration 13-decoration 1" is displayed. The combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the mini character Amcr has disappeared, but the mini character Amcr was displayed until just before this. In FIG. 28 (10), the combination of the decorative symbols of the normal jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

The mini character Amcr disappears at the same time as the end of the super reach effect (start of display of the temporary stop display), but may disappear before the end of the super reach effect (before the temporary stop display is displayed). Further, the mini character Amcr may disappear once after appearing and may reappear.

FIG. 28 (3') is another example following the figure (2), in which the mini character-related image mcg is displayed in the figure (2), but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (3'). Unlike the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 (3), a part of the mini character Amcr is not visible. In FIG. 28 (5'), the reach production was started, and the mini character Amcr did not appear before the reach was established. Although the super reach effect is performed in FIG. 28 (7'), the mini character Amcr has not appeared, and after all, the super reach effect is completed without the mini character appearing, and the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 28 (9') is completed. On the display device 208, the appearance of the defeat of the lord by the enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In FIG. 28 (10'), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the accessory vibration effect B and the mini character effect are performed. In FIG. 29, the upper effect device 2 is shown above the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 29 (7-1), after developing into a super reach effect, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the lord and the enemy samurai hold each other and face each other, and also displays a mini character-related image mcg. As shown in FIG. 28 (2), the mini character-related image mcg may be displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (7-2) that follows also shows that the lord and the enemy samurai are holding each other and facing each other, but the mini character related image mcg disappears and the mini character Amcr is above the left edge of the display screen. A part of is beginning to be seen. Further, the upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (7-2) is vibrating, and the accessory vibration effect B is performed. In this way, during the super reach, the mini character effect and the character vibration effect B may be executed in parallel. By doing this, it is possible to produce a hot effect by overlapping the two types of normal notices. However, the execution of the mini character effect and the execution of the character vibration effect B are not started at the same time. That is, the start timing of the execution of the mini character effect and the start timing of the execution of the accessory vibration effect B are different from each other. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (8 ″) displays the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other, and the rocket mini character Amcr is flying to the right. The upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (8 ″) has finished vibration and is in a stationary state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (9''), the mini character Amcr disappears, and a combination of lost decorative symbols such as “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. Although not shown, the combination of lost decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is confirmed and displayed as in FIG. 28 (10').

FIG. 29 (7-1') is in the same state as FIG. 29 (7-1), and after the development into the super reach effect, the mini character-related image mcg is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (7-2'), the mini character-related image mcg disappears, and a part of the mini character Bmcu begins to be seen above the left end of the display screen. On the other hand, the upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (7-2') does not vibrate and remains stationary at the initial position. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (8 ″ ″) displays the state after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other, and the mini character Bmcu is flying toward the right side. The mini character Bmcu is a UFO character. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (9-1), the mini character Bmcu disappears, and a combination of lost decorative symbols such as "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. There is. In this example, the mini character Bmcu appears, but the same applies to the case where the mini character Amcr appears. Further, the upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (9-1) is vibrating, and the accessory vibration effect B is performed.

In the following FIG. 29 (9-2), the temporary stop display is finished, and the wipe effect, which is a revival effect, is started. The upper effect device 2 shown in FIG. 29 (9-2) is in a stationary state after vibration. In the following FIG. 29 (9-3), the wipe-in is completed. When the wipe-in is completed, the wipe-out starts and a part of the decorative pattern becomes visible. In Fig. 29 (9-4), the wipe effect is finished and the normal jackpot decoration such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 13-Decoration 1" is completed. The combination of symbols is displayed as a temporary stop, and the revival production is successful. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (10 ″), the combination of the decorative symbols of the normal jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, unlike during the super reach, the mini character effect and the character vibration effect B are not executed in parallel during the temporary stop of the lost symbol. This is because if the accessory vibration effect is performed during the temporary stop of the lost symbol, the big hit is confirmed, so that the game is sufficiently excited without giving two types of normal notices.

Further, the character vibration effect B has the same effect execution period length (vibration period length) even if the start timing is different, whereas the mini character effect has the effect execution period when the start timing is different. The length (display period length) is also different. That is, if the mini character production is started before the reach is established, the execution period is from FIG. 28 (3) to immediately before the figure (9), and if it is started during the super reach, FIG. 29 (7-2). ) ~ Immediately before (9'') in the figure, and the lengths of both execution periods are different.

According to the above description
"Display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, upper effect device 2, decorative pattern display device 208], and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the character vibration effect B] that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 such as a mini character effect] that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.
When the effect means executes the first effect at the start timing of one of a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 21B] in one decorative symbol variation display. There is,
When the effect means executes the second effect at the start timing of one of a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 27B] in one decorative symbol variation display. There is,
The first effect is an effect in which the suggested jackpot expectation is different depending on which start timing is executed [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 21B].
The second effect is an effect in which the suggested jackpot expectation does not differ regardless of the start timing [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 27 (b)].
The first effect is the first start timing [for example, FIG. 21] before the start of the certain reach in the decorative symbol variation display in which the certain reach [for example, the SP reach shown in FIG. 21 (b)] is executed. Even if it is executed at the timing at the start of the fluctuation in (b), it is executed at the second start timing after the start of the certain reach [for example, at a certain timing during the SP reach in FIG. 21 (b)]. Is a production in which the length of the production period does not differ,
The second effect is a third start timing before the start of the certain reach in the decorative symbol variation display in which the certain reach is executed [for example, a certain timing before the reach is established in FIG. 27 (b)]. When executed in, the effect period is longer than when executed at the fourth start timing after the start of the certain reach [for example, a certain timing during the SP reach in FIG. 27 (b)]. It is a production that makes the length longer
The expectation of the second effect [for example, the jackpot expectation 55%] is higher than the expectation when the first effect is executed at the second start timing [for example, the jackpot expectation 45%]. high,
The effect period [for example, FIGS. 28 (3) to 28 (3)) when the second effect [for example, the effect of the mini character Amcr] is executed at the third start timing [for example, the timing of FIG. 28 (3)]. 9) immediately before] is a period including the second start timing [for example, the timing of FIG. 29 (7-2) in which the vibration effect of the upper effect device 2 is executed].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

also,
"When the effect means executes the first effect at the fifth start timing [for example, a certain timing during the temporary stop of the lost symbol in FIG. 21B], the second effect is performed by the second effect. It is impossible to execute in parallel with one effect [for example, the mini character effect disappears when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped] [for example, Fig. 29 (9-1) when the mini character Amcr appears instead of the mini character Bmcu],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, according to the above description,
"Display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, upper effect device 2, decorative pattern display device 208], and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the character vibration effect B] that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 such as a mini character effect] that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.
The effect means can execute the first effect at the start timing of one of a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 21B] in one decorative symbol variation display. It is a thing
The effect means can execute the second effect at the start timing of one of a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 27B] in one decorative symbol variation display. It is a thing
The first effect is an effect in which the suggested jackpot expectation is different depending on which start timing is executed [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 21B].
The second effect is an effect in which the suggested jackpot expectation does not differ regardless of the start timing [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 27 (b)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the above description
"Display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, upper effect device 2, decorative pattern display device 208], and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the character vibration effect B] that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 such as a mini character effect] that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.
The effect means can execute the first effect at the start timing of one of a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 21B] in one decorative symbol variation display. It is a thing
The effect means can execute the second effect at the start timing of one of a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 27B] in one decorative symbol variation display. It is a thing
The first effect is an effect in which the suggested jackpot expectation is different depending on which start timing is executed [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 21B].
The second effect is an effect in which the suggested jackpot expectation does not differ regardless of the start timing [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 27 (b)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by two types of production.

also,
"When the effect means performs the first effect [for example, the accessory vibration effect B] at the first start timing [for example, a certain timing during super reach], the second effect [for example". , Mini character A effect] can be executed in parallel with the first effect [for example, FIG. 29 (7-2)].
When the effect means executes the first effect at the second start timing [for example, a certain timing during the temporary stop of the lost symbol], the second effect is performed in parallel with the first effect. It is not feasible [for example, the mini character effect disappears when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped] [for example, FIG. 29 (9-1) when the mini character Amcr appears instead of the mini character Bmcu],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The effect means can perform the first effect [for example, the accessory vibration effect B] in both the decorative symbol variation display that becomes a big hit [for example, FIG. 24 (2)] and the decorative symbol variation display that becomes a loss [for example, FIG. 24 (2)]. For example, FIG. 29 (7-2)] is feasible.
The effect means that both the second effect [for example, the mini character A effect] and the decorative symbol variation display that becomes a big hit [for example, immediately before FIG. 28 (3) to FIG. (9)] are lost. It is feasible even in the variable display [for example, immediately before FIG. 29 (7-2) to FIG. 9 (9'')].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

"The first effect is an effect in which the execution period length of the effect is not different even if the start timing is different, and the second effect is an effect in which the execution period length of the effect is different when the start timing is different. [For example, if it is started before the reach is established, it is from FIG. 28 (3) to immediately before the figure (9), and if it is started during the SP reach, it is from FIG. 29 (7-2) to the same. Until just before the figure (9'')]. "
"One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a mini character B effect] that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the effect means is that the third effect is also performed once. It is executed at one start timing selected from a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 27 (b)] in the decorative symbol variation display, and the third effect is the execution. Even if the start timing is different, the suggested jackpot expectation is the same [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 27 (b)], and the jackpot expectation suggested by the third effect is the above-mentioned first. It may be the same as the expectation of the big hit suggested by the second effect. "Or, the second effect may be a plurality of effect modes [for example, an effect mode in which the mini character Amcr appears and an effect in which the mini character Bmcu appears." Aspect] may be an effect.

"The effect means can perform the first effect in both the decorative symbol variation display that becomes a big hit [for example, FIG. 24 (2)] and the decorative symbol variation display that becomes a loss [for example, FIG. 29 (7-2). ] Although it is feasible, it may not be feasible at a specific timing in the decorative symbol variation display that causes a loss [for example, the timing during the execution of the revival effect that eventually causes a loss] [for example, FIG. 27 (for example, FIG. 27 ( b) Multiple execution timings shown in)]. "
"The effect means may not start the execution of the first effect and the execution of the second effect at the same time." That is, the start timing of the execution of the first effect and the above. It may be different from the start timing of the execution of the second effect.

"The effect means may include a first effect means [for example, an upper effect device 2] and a second effect means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208]." In this case, the above-mentioned effect means. The first effect means may be capable of executing the first effect, and the second effect means may be capable of executing the second effect. Alternatively, the effect means may include a plurality of types of effect means, and the first effect and the second effect may be executed by different effect means, or the plurality of types of effect means may be executed. In some of the effect means [for example, the game board lamp 442 or the game underframe lamp 452], at least a part of the first effect and the second effect can be executed in common [for example, the above-mentioned It may emit light at the start of the first effect, and may also emit light at the start of the second effect].

"The first effect [for example, the accessory vibration effect B] is the first when it is executed in the second gaming state [for example, the probabilistic gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, or the probabilistic and time-saving gaming state]. The expected jackpot suggestion may be higher than when executed in one gaming state [eg, non-probable variable gaming state, non-time saving gaming state, or normal gaming state (non-probable and non-shortening gaming state)]. "The second effect [for example, the mini character effect] is also expected to be a jackpot that is suggested when it is executed in the second gaming state than when it is executed in the first gaming state. The degree may be high. "Or, the first effect is suggested whether it is executed in the second gaming state or in the first gaming state. Expectations for big hits may be the same. Whether the second effect is executed in the second gaming state or the first gaming state, the suggested jackpot expectation is the same. May be good. The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Although the term "game state" is used here, the game state can be read as the effect mode when the effect mode is based on the game state.

In addition, the production means may perform the first production at a plurality of start timings in the reach variation display [for example, when the reach is established, when the super reach develops, after the super reach develops, when the special super reach develops, and after the special super reach develops. ], It may be executed at one start timing selected from the above, and the effect means also has a plurality of start timings in the reach variation display [for example, when reach is established, super reach]. It may be executed at one start timing selected from [at the time of development, after the development of super reach, at the time of development of special super reach, after development of special super reach].

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state shortly before the time-saving gaming state ends.

In each figure shown in FIG. 30, a decorative symbol display device 208, a time-saving medium-time lamp TL, a right-handed display lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium-time lamp HL are shown. Each lamp represents a lighting state in black and a lighting state in white (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 40). Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30A is provided with a fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the hold number, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 is displayed in the upper left part. An area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Special Figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right portion, and a symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 is provided in the lower right portion. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the normal map and a hold number display area of the normal map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1 is matched with the holding number shown in the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 is the holding lamp 220 of the special drawing 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1, while the symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is off, it is displayed as "×". Stop is displayed. Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol change display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG. 40.

Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30A, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed large in the center of the display screen.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is displayed. In FIG. 30A, since the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed, the variation icon disappears and is not displayed.

The control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 30A is a time-saving gaming state. More specifically, it is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The time saving middle lamp TL shown in FIG. 30A is on, and the high accuracy middle lamp HL is off. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 11B, right-handed striking is recommended in the short-time gaming state, and the right-handed striking indicator lamp RL shown in FIG. 30A is also lit. In addition, a right-handed first display RH1 for urging right-handed is displayed on the left side of the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (a). This right-handed first display RH1 is a display that continues to be displayed even when the symbol variation display of the special figure ends during the time-saving game state, and continues to be displayed even when the demo screen is displayed. Even after shifting to the demo screen, the right-handed display lamp RL also continues to light.

The time-saving game state in FIG. 30A is a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) in which the big hit game is completed and started without the game ball passing through the V-passing switch VC, or 950 times of special figure loss is continuous. This is the time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that was started. The background of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (a) is the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. Further, the state in FIG. 30A is a state in which the time-saving gaming state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state when the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed four more times. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30A, the character "remaining 4" is displayed as a time-saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time-saving game state continues only four times. In addition, the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) when the big hit game is completed and started, the time-saving game state where 950 times special figure loss is continuously started (b time-saving game state), and suddenly the time is shortened and started. The background in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different depending on the time-saving game state (c time-saving game state), and the display mode of the time-saving game state remaining number of times display may also be different. Further, the background in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different between the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the display mode of the time-saving game state remaining number of times display is also different. May be good.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the time-saving gaming state, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220 of the special figure 2, the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2, and the number of the holding icons of the special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon closer to the variable icon display area 280 (the hold icon on the right side) becomes the older hold icon.

In FIG. 30A, three hold icons h21, h22, h23 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the hold icons h11, h12, of these three special figures 2 are displayed. All of h23 are displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode). The default display mode is a round, non-patterned and white display mode. On the drawing, white is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the left. The hold icon suggests the expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead notice depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display performed by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon. The default display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. It may be suggested that the jackpot expectation is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit in the first place. In the following description, if it is the default display mode, the description to that effect may be omitted.

In addition, in FIG. 30A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

In FIG. 30B, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has started. That is, in this figure, the symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 3) (not shown) is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the decoration is finished. The variable display of the design has also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 2, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h21, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The display mode of this variable icon is also the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 3".

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the display of the music selection display MC capable of selecting the music output from the speaker 120 is started on the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. To. The music name of "music 1" is displayed on the music selection display MC displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30B, and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 (not shown here). The music output will be described in detail in FIGS. 35 and later.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (c), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The music selection display MC disappears once each time the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display is resumed each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 30 (d), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right side by one, and only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In addition, the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced by one to display "remaining 2".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (e), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814".

In FIG. 30 (f), the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is started, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right side by one, and no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the number of holds is 0. Further, the hold icon h21 in the default display mode, which has been the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 30 (f) is a red display mode different from the default display mode. On the drawing, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. The variation icon h0 in the red display mode suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display is 50%, and a so-called normal notice is executed. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and next to it is a symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state. The characters "LAST" are displayed. Although the time-saving game state remaining number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears and is hidden, it may be displayed as "remaining 1". Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (f), the display of the right-handed second display RH2 that encourages right-handed display in a display mode different from that of the right-handed first display RH1 is started. In the right-handed second display RH2, it is written that the hold of the special figure 2 is stored aiming at the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) in the figure of the arrow pointing to the right. This is a notification that it is recommended to acquire the special figure 2 remaining hold that suddenly leads to the short-time winning. At the stage of FIG. 30 (f), the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, but even if the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is full (4), the right-handed second display RH2 is displayed. Further, the speaker 120 also has started a right-handed notification (voice output of "right-handed and save the hold") for prompting the right-handed hit and accumulating the hold of the special figure 2. Further, the music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120. While the right-handed notification sound is being output, the output sound of the music 1 may be reduced, or the music 1 may be completely muted. Right-handed second display Whether it is right-handed notification by RH2 or right-handed notification from the speaker 120, execution is started when the symbol variation display of the last special figure that can maintain the time-saving gaming state is started. .. The display start timing of the right-handed second display RH2 may be the same as the start timing of the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display of the last special symbol, or the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. It may be the timing after that. Further, the start timing of the right-handed notification from the speaker 120 may be the same as the start timing of the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation display of the last special symbol, or the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. It may be the timing after that, or it may be the timing after the symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 3) (see FIG. 3), which is not shown, is started and before the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. good.

In FIG. 30 (g), there are two prizes in the second special figure start opening 232, the hold of the special figure 2 is increased by two, and the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. The numerical value shown is 2, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In FIG. 30 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the second special figure start opening 232 has one more prize, and the hold of the special figure 2 is increased by one, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 3. The third hold icon h23 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

In the example shown in FIG. 30, although the reach state is entered in FIG. 30 (h), it does not develop into super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (i) has “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration”. The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". Further, in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (i), the character "end" indicating that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state has ended is displayed. .. When the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed, the right-handed first display RH1 and the right-handed second display RH2 that have been displayed up to that point disappear and disappear. In addition, the right-handed notification that has been output from the speaker 120 up to that point has also ended. It should be noted that these end timings may be at the same time as the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be after the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. Alternatively, it may be the timing after the symbol variation display of the last special symbol is completed and before the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed, or the timing before the symbol variation display of the last special symbol is completed. May be good. The number of reservations in Special Figure 2 has finally reached four, and the tank is full. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 shown in FIG. 30 (i) is 4, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 has a fourth hold icon. h24 is also displayed.

In addition, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden (erased) in response to the accumulation of four reservations of special figure 2, and a display suggesting that four reservations of special figure 2 are accumulated (indication). For example, a character display indicating that the tank is full on hold, a character display indicating that the product is ready, etc.) may be performed. In this case, if four reservations of special figure 2 are not accumulated by the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the right-handed second display RH2 is hidden according to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It should be done (it should be erased).

In FIG. 30 (j), the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The time saving medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 30 (j) is turned off, and the high accuracy middle lamp HL is also turned off. When the state of the time-saving game is changed to the non-time-saving game state, if the hold of the special figure 2 remains, the special figure 2 remaining hold is preferentially digested because it is the special figure 2 priority variable machine. As described above, the time-saving symbol shown in FIG. 5C may be stopped and displayed only in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is performed as a result of the remaining reservation of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state. .. During the period in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "pull-back period"), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is It becomes a dedicated background. In this example, an animation in which the main character, the lord, is running is displayed, and the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed.

In addition, since the remaining hold of special figure 2 is exhausted during the pullback period, the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is in a time-saving gaming state in order to more clearly notify how many more holds are left in special figure 2. It is continuously displayed from. The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 may be displayed together, or the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (j), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the three reserved icons h21 to h23 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is also 3, and the display of “−” is started to blink in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 11 (b), left-handed strike is recommended in the non-time-saving game state, the right-handed indicator lamp RL shown in FIG. 30 (j) is also turned off, and the decoration shown in FIG. 30 (j) is turned off. The right-handed first display RH1 is also not displayed on the symbol display device 208. However, during the pullback period, the left-handed notification that prompts the left-handed is restricted even though the game is in a non-time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 30 (j), even if the time-saving gaming state is changed to the non-time-saving gaming state, the left-handed notification is not executed during the pullback period. In FIG. 30 (k), the right-handed hitting so far is continued, and the game ball is launched toward the right side area of the game area 124. The same applies when the player changes from right-handed to left-handed, but happens to be right-handed. In the non-time-saving game state, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 provided in the right side region, left-handed notification (left-handed second display LH2) is executed (FIG. 31 (m) etc.). In FIG. 30 (l), it was detected that the game ball passed through the normal drawing start opening 228, but the left-handed notification was not executed. This is because, as explained with reference to FIG. 5 (a), the special figure 1 does not have a time saving symbol, and when a left-handed strike is performed, suddenly the time-saving cannot be obtained. Not recommended. However, right-handed hitting is not recommended because it is extremely rare to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 when hitting right-handed. After all, it is a good idea not to fire the game ball during this pullback period.

It should be noted that the left-handed notification is not executed even during the restoration display when a power failure occurs during the pullback period and the restoration is performed. Further, even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the starting port 228 during this restoration, the left-handed notification is not executed. On the other hand, if a power failure occurs in a non-time-saving game state that is not a pullback period, and it is detected that the game ball has passed the normal drawing start port 228 during the recovery display when the game is restored, a left-handed notification is executed. .. It should be noted that the left-handed notification during the recovery display may be notified by the left-handed display and the left-handed notification sound, as in the case of the left-handed notification described later in FIG. 31 or the like, or only the left-handed display is displayed. It may be, or it may be a notification that only notifies the left-handed notification sound. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (m), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" was stopped and displayed, and the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "541".

In FIG. 30 (n), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started. In FIG. 30 (n), the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is reduced by one, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 2, and the special figure 2 Two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (o), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and even here, the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "245".

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 30 step by step.

In FIG. 31 (a) following from FIG. 30 (o), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the decorative symbol is variable display. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started. In FIG. 31 (a), the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is reduced by one again, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 1, and the special figure is shown. Only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (b), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 9-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and again, the winner was not suddenly won in a short time. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "195".

In FIG. 31 (c), the last special figure 2 remaining hold symbol variable display is started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 in the 4th symbol / holding number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started, the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 becomes 0, and the holding of the special figure 2 is held. No hold icon is displayed in the icon display area 282.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 6-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and in the end, in this example, the time is suddenly not won. rice field. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "261". The pullback period ends with FIG. 31 (d). In this example, the pullback period is the period of FIGS. 30 (j) to 31 (d). The pullback period is a period in which the length differs depending on the number of remaining reservations in Special Figure 2 and the time length of the symbol variation display of each special figure.

In FIG. 31 (e), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed due to the end of the pull-back period. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (e) displays a background (a white background without a pattern) representing a non-time saving gaming state. Further, when the pullback period is completed, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Further, when the pullback period ends, the left-handed first display LH1 for prompting left-handed is displayed over the left-handed notification period. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (e), the left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the left-handed first display LH1 is a display mode in which the character left-handed is written in a figure in which a left-pointing arrow is deformed. Further, the left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed is also started from the speaker 120. In FIG. 31 (e), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the blinking of "-" is started, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 is 0. Further, no hold icon is displayed in the newly displayed hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

The player sees the left-handed first display LH1, starts left-handed, and aims at the special figure 1 starting port 230. In FIG. 31 (f), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by two, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 2, and the hold icon display of the special figure 1 is displayed. Two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the area 281.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (g), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "923". Further, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is further increased by one, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 3, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 The third hold icon h13 is also displayed.

In FIG. 31 (h), a new symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 2, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the left side by one, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Even if the symbol variation display of the new special figure 1 is started, the left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (i) displays the left-handed first display LH1. Left-handed first display LH1 disappears and is hidden. The left-handed notification period, which starts when the pullback period ends, is a predetermined period with a predetermined time length, and may end within one symbol variation display depending on the time length of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. For example, it may be displayed over multiple times of the symbol variation display. It should be noted that the left-handed notification period may be terminated by displaying the symbol variation a predetermined number of times (for example, once), or when the reservation of the special figure 1 is accumulated in a predetermined number (for example, one or four). You may try to do it. In such a case, the left-handed notification period becomes an indefinite period.

If a power failure occurs and is restored during the left-handed notification period, the execution of the left-handed first display LH1 is continued. Further, the left-handed notification during the left-handed notification period may be performed only by the left-handed first display LH1 or may be performed only by the left-handed notification from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 31 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is further increased by two, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 4, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 Four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the display area 281.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (j), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "729".

In FIG. 31 (k), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 3, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the left side by one, and three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 31 (l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start opening 228. That is, right-handed strike is detected. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the left-handed second display LH2 for prompting left-handed. This left-handed second display LH2 is a display in a display mode different from that of the left-handed first display LH1, and is a character display such as "Please return to left-handed". The left-handed second display LH2 is displayed for a certain period each time a right-handed hit is detected. In addition to displaying the left-handed second display LH2, the speaker 120 may perform left-handed notification (for example, return to left-handed).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (n), the left-handed second display LH2 disappears, the hold of the special figure 1 increases again, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. The numerical value shown in the area is 4, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. In addition, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the 4th symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped and displayed with "x" in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284. At the same time, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of "924".

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the period length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in FIG. 31. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 31 will be mainly described, and overlapping description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 was four, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 32, the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is only one. That is, in FIG. 32 (f), the symbol variation display of the final special figure 2 in which the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is started at 0 and the time-saving gaming state can be maintained, and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won only once. I didn't. As a result, it is shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (i) at which the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed. The numerical value is 1, and only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 32 (j), the state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). In FIG. 32 (j), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 remaining hold, which has only one, is immediately started, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. That is, the pullback period has started. Even during this pullback period, right-handed strikes are detected (FIG. 32 (k)), but left-strike second display LH2 is not executed (FIG. 32 (l)). The display is completed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (m), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Even in this example, I didn't win suddenly in a short time. The pullback period ends with FIG. 32 (m). The pullback period in this example is the period from FIG. 32 (j) to FIG. 32 (m), which is shorter than the pullback period in the example shown in FIG. 31. However, if the period length of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 remaining hold is very long, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 31. Further, even when the number of remaining holds in FIG. 2 is two or three, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 31, or shorter than the pullback period of the example shown in FIG. 32. It may be a withdrawal period.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 32, when the pullback period ends, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to a background (a white background with no pattern) indicating a non-time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. are doing. Further, when the pullback period is completed, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Further, since the pullback period has ended, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started. Further, the left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed is also started from the speaker 120. In FIG. 32 (n), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the same figure (o), the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued. are doing.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 32 step by step.

In FIG. 33 (a) following from FIG. 32 (o), the pull-back period ends and the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows “Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3”. The combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is stopped and displayed. In this example, a prize is awarded to the special figure 1 starting port 230 from the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 is started) to the end of the symbol variation display. However, I couldn't save the hold of Special Figure 1 because it wasn't done once. Therefore, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started immediately after FIG. 33 (a), and the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 33 (b). Even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started, the left-handed first display LH1 remains displayed until the left-handed notification period, which is a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), ends. The left-handed first display LH1 continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (b). During this time, the player continued to hit left and aimed to win the special figure 1 starting port 230, but there was still no winning to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the left-handed notification period ended soon. The left-handed first display LH1 disappears and disappears (FIG. 33 (c)). Even if the left-handed first display LH1 disappears, there is no prize for the special figure 1 starting port 230, and in FIG. 33 (d), the special figure 1 starting port 230 is finally won, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. It is started, and the decorative design also starts to change display.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 33, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 (FIG. 33 (g)), as shown in FIG. The left-handed second display LH2 that prompts left-handed is displayed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a stepwise example when there is no pullback period. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 31 will be mainly described, and overlapping description may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is four, and in the example shown in FIG. 32, the number of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 is one, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 34, the number of the remaining hold is one. Then, the number of remaining reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. That is, in FIG. 34 (f), the symbol variation display of the final special figure 2 in which the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is started at 0 and the time-saving gaming state can be maintained, and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won once. There was no. As a result, it is shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (i) when the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed. The numerical value is 0, and no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In this state, when the state is changed from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), there is no pullback period, and as shown in FIG. 34 (j), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is , The background of the castle town, which represents the time-saving game state, changes to the unpatterned background of the white background, which represents the non-time-saving game state. Further, instead of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, the display of the left-handed first display LH1 has started. Further, the left-handed notification (voice output of "please left-handed") for prompting left-handed is also started from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 34 (j), the pending symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the following figure (k), the symbol of the special figure 1 is started. The variable display is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed that the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped. Also in the example shown in FIG. 34, as in the example shown in FIG. 33 above, from the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 is started) to the end of the symbol variation display. During that time, there was no prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the hold of special figure 1 could not be saved. Therefore, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started immediately after FIG. 34 (k), and in this example, the demo display is started after the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed ( During (for example, 30 seconds), the special figure 1 starting port 230 has not been awarded once, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the demo display. A symbol demo is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (l). In the demo display, the setting menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by operating the effect button 136 shown in FIG. From the setting menu, for example, the volume of the speaker 120 and the brightness of the frame lamp 122 can be adjusted. As shown in FIG. 34 (l), even after shifting to the demo display, the left-handed first display LH1 is continuously displayed until the left-handed notification period elapses.

As shown in FIG. 34 (m), when the left-handed notification period elapses, the left-handed first display LH1 disappears and disappears. In this example, there is still no prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the demo display continues to be displayed. When the game ball is continuously fired while the demo display is displayed and it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228 (FIG. 34 (n)), as shown in the figure (o). In the demo display screen, the left-handed second display LH2 that prompts left-handed is displayed. The left-handed notification in the demo display may output a sound together with the display, or may output only the sound instead of the display. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 34, the symbol demo is displayed as the demo display, but the same applies even when the animation demo is displayed.

In addition to the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the voice output from the speaker 120, the right-handed notification can also be performed by blinking the right lamp of the frame lamp 122. In addition to the display on the decorative symbol display device 208, the left-handed notification can also be performed by outputting voice from the speaker 120 or blinking the left lamp of the frame lamp 122.

Further, the display mode is different between the left-handed first display LH1 during the left-handed notification period and the left-handed second display LH2 displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed the normal drawing start port 228. , The same display mode may be used. Further, although the display period length of the left-handed first display LH1 and the display period length of the left-handed second display LH2 are different, they may be the same period length.

In addition, the notification of how to hit during restoration due to a power failure is executed depending on the actual game state. For example, in the case of recovery during the pullback period, the left-handed notification is not executed even if the right-handed hit is detected. On the other hand, in the case of recovery during the symbol change of the special figure in the non-time saving game state, if the right-handed hit is detected, the left-handed hit notification is executed.

Next, the selection of music will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the music output from the speaker 120 can be selected by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. The music that can be selected depends on whether or not the predetermined conditions are satisfied. In this pachinko machine 100, by pressing the setting change button 194 shown in FIG. 2, it is possible to change the setting values having different jackpot probabilities. Normally, the player does not know which set value is set. Which set value is set is an important concern for the player, and in this pachinko machine 100, the setting suggestion suggesting the set value is made by using the music. The above-mentioned predetermined condition is not satisfied until a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state. Therefore, even if a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. That is, it is a predetermined condition that a big hit is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of being digested in the non-time saving game state.

In addition, as a predetermined condition, instead of making a big hit with the special figure 2 remaining hold, or in addition to making a big hit with the special figure 2 remaining hold, as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit will be made again. It may be that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villa). Alternatively, the player may win the most advantageous jackpot (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions). In this pachinko machine 100, the most advantageous jackpot for a player is the special figure A, which is a 10R probability variation jackpot. On the contrary, the jackpot that is the most disadvantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot with the smallest number of rounds (special figure B that is a 2R probability variation jackpot) or the jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions (special figure b that is a 3R normal jackpot)). You may win the prize, or you may win the big hit of the 10th consecutive villa.

Also, instead of the setting suggestion that suggests the setting value, or in addition to the setting suggestion, a song that suggests that there is a hold that becomes a big hit again as a result of pre-reading in the hold during the big hit game (so-called hold consecutive villa). It may be a song that suggests a hit type (for example, whether or not there is a probability change, or a round promotion occurs, etc.), or it suggests that it is a big hit for the 10th consecutive villa. It may be a musical piece. Furthermore, if the suggestion of the game information by the music is the game information that the player cannot normally know, the suggestion content becomes useful.

FIG. 35A is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not satisfied.

When the music can be selected, it becomes a big hit game state, a time-saving game state, and a non-time-saving game state. The music cannot be selected while the symbol of the special figure is stopped, and therefore the music cannot be selected even during the demo display. However, the music may be selected from the above-mentioned setting menu.

In addition, even if the symbol of the special figure is stopped, the music may be selectable.

Further, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music suggesting the set value cannot be selected, so that the music that can be selected does not change regardless of which set value (settings 1 to 6) the pachinko machine 100 is set.

The songs that can be selected when the predetermined condition is not satisfied are five songs from the song 1 to the song 5. Music 1 is a default music, and when the RAM is cleared, this music 1 is set. Further, this music 1 is set every time the game shifts to the non-time saving game state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 30, the music 1 is still set from the beginning, but if a music other than the music 1 is selected, the music 1 is set at the timing of FIG. 30 (j).

FIG. 35B is a diagram showing a list of songs selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the jackpot is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and one song is selected by the internal lottery during the winning jackpot game. The result is selected and set. That is, it is not selected by the player, but is automatically selected by the pachinko machine 100. The selection rate shown in FIG. 35 (b) corresponds to the permutation rate by lottery. The songs selected here include songs that suggest setting values. The music 6 is not a music that suggests a setting value like the music 1 to the music 5, but the music 7 is a music that suggests that the setting is 3 or more, and the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 3 or more. If it is not set, it will not be selected. The music 8 is a music suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and is not selected unless the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 5 or 6. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 1 or 2, the music 6 is selected with a 100% probability.

Even after the predetermined condition is satisfied once, the predetermined condition may be satisfied again, and the music is selected by lottery in the same manner even when the predetermined condition is satisfied for the second time and thereafter. When the predetermined conditions are satisfied multiple times, the same music may be selected. It is also possible to increase the number of songs so that the songs selected once are not selected.

As described above, the number of songs described with reference to FIG. 35 is an example, and more songs may be used. Even in this case, the number of songs that can be output from the speaker 120 is smaller when the predetermined condition is satisfied than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, under this relationship, the songs 1 to 5 may include the songs 6 to 8. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, only one song is selected by lottery, but based on the above relationship, even if a plurality of songs are selected by lottery and the player finally selects one song. good.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a list of songs selected after the predetermined condition is satisfied even once. Note that FIG. 35 (b) is referred to for the jackpot gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the jackpot gaming state in FIG. 36 is the jackpot gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied even once. That is.

In the non-time saving game state, as described with reference to FIG. 35 (a), the music 1 to the music 5 can be selected by the player operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190. .. Further, if the music 6 is selected by lottery even once in the jackpot game started when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music 6 is released until the RAM is cleared, and the music 1 to the music 5 are released. Similarly, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once and the music 7 or the music 8 is selected, the music 7 and the music 8 are not released in the non-time-saving gaming state and cannot be selected by the operation of the player. That is, when the music 6 is released, when the operation of the upper button 191 is repeated, the music names of the music 1 to the music 6 are displayed in order on the music selection display MC, and the music names of the music 6 are displayed. If the upper button 191 is operated while the button is on, the song title is returned to that of the song 1, and the song name of the song 7 or the song name of the song 8 is not displayed on the music selection display MC in the first place.

In the time-saving game state or the big hit game state in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, the big hit game state started by winning the big hit in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state), the music 1 to the music 5 Up to this point can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as in the non-time saving game state. Further, if the music 6 is released, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same manner as the music 1 to the music 5. Further, when the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 1 or 2, the music 7 and the music 8 are not selected by lottery even if the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the music 7 and the music 8 are not released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 3 or 4, the music 7 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and if it is selected, it is released and the operation key unit 190 is operated. However, since the music 8 is not selected by lottery, it is not released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to the setting 5 or 6, the music 7 or the music 8 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and if it is selected, it is released and the operation key unit 190. It can be selected by operating. As described above, in the time-saving game state or the big hit game state in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music 6 to the music 8 can be selected by the player after that if they are selected by one lottery. However, if it has not been selected by lottery even once, the player cannot select it. Similarly, when the music 6 is released and the music 7 and the music 8 cannot be selected, the operation of the upper button 191 is repeated, and the music selection display MC displays the music titles of the music 1 to the music 6. It is displayed in order, and when the upper button 191 is operated while the song name of the song 6 is displayed, the song name returns to the song 1 and the song name of the song 7 and the song name of the song 8 are displayed on the music selection display MC in the first place. There is no such thing.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing step by step an example different from the example shown in FIG. 30 following from FIG. 30 (h).

Similar to the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (a) following from FIG. 30 (h) has a loss of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4". The combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the character "end" indicating that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state has ended is displayed.

Further, the third hold icon h23 shown in FIG. 37 (a) has changed from the default display mode to the gold display mode. On the drawing, the gold color is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. The hold icon in the gold display mode corresponds to a so-called look-ahead notice that suggests that the expectation of a big hit in the hold symbol variation display represented by the hold icon is 75%.

In FIG. 37 (b), as in FIG. 30 (j), the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low-probability normal-figure low-probability state), and the time-saving medium lamp TL is turned off, so that the accuracy is high. The middle lamp HL is also off. Further, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a dedicated background in which the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC is started. Music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120.

Further, the display mode of the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 37 (b) is changed from the default display mode to the time saving display mode. This time saving display mode is a display mode of a look-ahead notice that suggests that the player will suddenly win the time saving, and is the default display mode when the game shifts to the non-time saving gaming state (special figure 2 has entered the digestion of the remaining hold). It is a display mode changed from the display mode. That is, the look-ahead notice that suggests that the winner will be suddenly won in a short time will be started when the pullback period is started. The hold icon in the gold display mode is the second hold icon h22.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (c), the combination of the lost decorative symbols in "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and in the following FIG. The symbol variation display is started again, and the decorative symbol is variable display. In the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 in the time saving display mode is displayed, and a normal notice is executed. That is, it is suggested that the expectation of suddenly winning in a short time is 75% in the currently performed symbol variation display. The hold icon in the gold display mode is the first hold icon h21.

In FIG. 37 (e), the time saving symbol (special figure D) shown in FIG. 5 (b) is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (e), the characters of success are displayed, and three "decoration 11" (decorative symbols in a short time) shown in FIG. 5 (c) are stopped and displayed side by side. That is, it is notified that the winner was suddenly won in a short time. However, although the winner was suddenly won in a short time, the jackpot was not won, so the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is stopped and displayed with "x". Further, the mini-design is stopped and displayed not by the combination of the decoration 11 but by a specific combination of numbers (321). In addition, this specific combination is a combination that stops and displays only when a time-saving symbol that is not stopped and displayed is won at the time of loss or a big hit.

By suddenly winning in a short time, the game shifts to a short time game without going through the big hit game. The time-saving medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 37 (f) is lit, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the background of the castle town showing the time-saving gaming state. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "remaining 949" is displayed as a display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state indicating that the time-saving game state continues 949 times. In addition, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit due to the transition to the time-saving game state. In addition, the golden display mode icon, which has been the first hold icon h21, has become the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. The variation icon h0 in the gold display mode is a normal notice suggesting that the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display started here is 75%. The music 1 is continuously output from the speaker 120, and the music selection display MC is also started to be displayed.

In FIG. 37 (g), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 37 (h), it develops into a super reach, the hold icon display area 282 and the variable icon display area 280 of the special figure 2 disappear, and the music selection display MC also displays the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state such as "remaining 949". It's gone. In addition, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right corner. From the speaker 120, the music A dedicated to the super reach is output instead of the music 1 that has been continuously output.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (i), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The combination is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. Further, in the 4th symbol / reserved number display area 284, the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777". The big hit here is a big hit in the remaining hold of Special Figure 2, but the predetermined condition is not satisfied because the game was suddenly won in a short time and the game was changed to the short game state.

In FIG. 37 (j), the opening effect of the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character display of congratulations on the big hit. Further, since the variable winning opening 234 is arranged in the right side region, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit. The lamp TL is turned off during the time reduction. Further, at the start of the big hit game (during the opening effect), the right-handed second display RH2 that prompts the right-handed player is also displayed in addition to the right-handed first display RH1. This right-handed second display RH2 is a display mode in which the characters "hit on the right side" are displayed between the right-pointing arrows lined up at intervals, and is larger than the right-handed first display RH1. be. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a right-handed notification voice saying "hit to the right".

Further, since it is a big hit game started without satisfying a predetermined condition, at least music 1 to music 5 can be selected, and the music selection display MC is displayed except for a part of the period during the big hit game. On the music selection display MC, a display UD imitating the upper button 191 and the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is displayed, and during the period when the music selection display MC is displayed, the upper button 191 or the upper button 191 or Music can be selected by operating the lower button 192. The music name of "music 1" is displayed on the music selection display MC displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (j), and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 together with the voice output of the right-handed notification. ing. While the right-handed notification sound is being output, the output sound of the music 1 may be reduced, or the music 1 may be completely muted.

In FIG. 37 (k), the first round is started and the right-handed second display RH2 disappears and is hidden, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Further, the right-handed notification voice is no longer output from the speaker 120, and only the music 1 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the first round has started displays a musical piece moving image corresponding to the music 1 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation in which the main character, Tonosama, shows off swordsmanship in time with music 1, and the lyrics of music 1 are also displayed. In addition, the music selection display MC is also displayed.

In FIG. 37 (l), the second round has started. In the 2R probability variation jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in this second round (final round), and V prizes can be obtained. On the decorative symbol display device 208 where the second round has started, the character display "Aim for V" prompting the V passage switch VS to pass the game ball is displayed, and the music video is continuously displayed. However, the music selection display MC disappears and is hidden. That is, in the round (final round) in which the V prize can be obtained, the music cannot be selected. The speaker 120 continues to output the music 1.

In FIG. 37 (m), the game ball passes through the V-passing switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the V-winning has been won. That is, it is notified that the state will shift to the probable change state after the big hit game is completed. When the V prize notification is performed, the music moving image is hidden, but it may continue to be displayed together with the V prize notification. On the other hand, although the music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120, the V prize notification sound may be output from the speaker 120 together with the music 1, or the V prize notification sound may be output instead of the music 1. .. Also, even after winning the V prize, it is not possible to select songs until the end of the second round, but once the V prize is won, it is possible to select songs for the remaining period of the two rounds. You may.

In FIG. 37 (n), the end effect of the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character display of the end of the big hit. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed during the period of the big hit game, and is also displayed in this end effect. Further, the music 1 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect. Further, in the end effect, the display of the music selection display MC is restarted, and the music can be selected by operating the up button 191 or the down button 192. However, the end effect may also be such that the music cannot be selected as in the round in which the V prize can be obtained. In this way, it is not possible to select music during a part of the jackpot game. Further, during the period in which the super reach shown in FIG. 37 (h) is performed, the music cannot be selected. Further, as shown in FIGS. 37 (a), 37 (c), and (i), the music cannot be selected even while the symbol of the special figure is stopped. It should be noted that the music cannot be selected even when the specific mode is set or the setting menu is displayed.

By hitting right during the jackpot game, he also won a prize at the 2nd special figure start opening 232, and up to 4 special figure 2 holds have been accumulated. When the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the hold of the special figure 2 accumulated up to four is exhausted, and the variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (o), the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "remaining 119" is displayed as a display of the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state indicating that the time-saving game state continues 119 times. Further, the time-saving medium lamp TL and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL shown in FIG. 37 (o) are also lit. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right-handed display lamp RL is also lit. In addition, the music selection display MC in which the music title of "music 1" is displayed is also displayed, and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

FIG. 38 shows step by step an example in which the first hold icon h21 among the hold icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is finished is a gold display mode. It is a figure.

In the example shown in FIG. 37, the third hold icon h21 among the hold icons of the special figure 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special figure is completed is the gold display mode, but in this example, the first The hold icon h21 of is a gold display mode. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 37 will be mainly described, and overlapping description may be omitted.

The first hold icon h21 in the golden display mode shown in FIG. 38 (a) is the variable icon h0 in the gold display mode when the digestion of the remaining hold in FIG. 2 is started (when the pullback period is started). (See FIG. 38 (b)).

Here, showing the result of pre-reading, the special figure 2 symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the variation icon h0 in the gold display mode) that is currently performed is a jackpot symbol variation display. Further, in the special figure 2 symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 38 (b)) to be started next, the winner is suddenly won in a short time. As a result of this look-ahead, since the jackpot is won in the preceding symbol variation display, the symbol variation display corresponding to this first hold icon h21 is performed in the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state acquired by the jackpot. In order to give priority to the time-saving game status acquired by the big hit instead of updating the time-saving suddenly, the winning of the time-saving is invalidated. Therefore, unlike the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 37 (b), the first hold icon h21 is not displayed in the time saving display mode, and in FIG. 38 (b), the first hold icon h21 is displayed in the default display mode. Has been done. That is, even if there is a hold scheduled to be won in the time-saving symbol, if there is a hold to win the jackpot before the hold is exhausted, the pre-reading notice for the time-saving symbol is prohibited.

In FIG. 38 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 38 (d), the music A has evolved into a super reach, and the music A dedicated to the super reach is output from the speaker 120 in place of the music 1 that has been continuously output. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. are doing. The jackpot here is a jackpot in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In FIG. 38 (f), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the music title of the music 8 is displayed on the music selection determination display MD, and it is notified that the music 8 has been selected by lottery. Further, the music 8 is output from the speaker 120. The music 8 is a music suggesting that the setting is 5 or 6, and a player who knows this can know that the pachinko machine 100 currently playing is a high setting pachinko machine. Further, the music 8 is a music that may be selected only for the pachinko machine 100 that is actually set to the setting 5 or 6, and is a rare music because the selection rate is low, and the music 8 can be heard. In some cases, the interest of the game may be improved. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (f) displays a right-handed first display RH1 and a right-handed second display RH2, and the speaker 120 "strikes to the right" together with the music 8. The right-handed notification voice is also output.

In FIG. 38 (g), the first round is started and the right-handed second display RH2 disappears and is hidden, but the right-handed first display RH1 is still displayed. Further, the right-handed notification sound is no longer output from the speaker 120, and only the music 8 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the first round has started displays a musical piece moving image corresponding to the music 8 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation in which the loincloth-style bancho decides a pose according to the music 8, and the lyrics of the music 8 are also displayed. The lyrics display of the music 1 without setting suggestion shown in FIG. 37 (k) and FIG. 37 (l) is the character display of the first color (for example, the black character display), but the lyrics display of the music 8 suggesting a high setting. Is a second color character display (for example, gold character display). The lyrics display of the music 7 may be a character display of a third color (for example, a red character display). Further, the music selection determination display MD is also displayed in FIG. 38 (g).

In FIG. 38 (h), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 38, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music moving image is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD disappears and is hidden. The speaker 120 continues to output the music 8.

In FIG. 38 (i), the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the V prize has been won, and the music movie is hidden. In addition, the music selection determination display MD remains hidden. On the other hand, the music 8 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 38 (j), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the display of the music selection determination display MD has been resumed. Further, the music 8 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect.

In FIG. 38 (k), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the music 8 is selected by lottery, the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 8 is displayed in the time-saving game state is also started. From the speaker 120, the music 8 is continuously output from the big hit game.

In FIG. 38 (l), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The stopped symbol change display of the special figure 2 is the hold symbol change display represented by the first hold icon h21 at the time when the digestion of the special figure 2 remaining hold is started (the time when the pullback period is started). be. As mentioned above, it was originally a symbol variation display that was suddenly won in a short time, but since the jackpot with a time reduction was won first, the time reduction symbol is not stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. , Does not shift to the time-saving game state based on the time-saving symbol. That is, it can be said that the stop display of the time-saving symbol is restricted in the time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only in the non-time-saving gaming state. However, the time-saving symbol may be stopped and displayed even in the time-saving game state.

In the figure (m) following FIG. 38 (l), the number of time-saving game state remaining number of times display is reduced by one, the character "remaining 118" is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In n), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 38 (o), the number of time-saving game state remaining number of times display is further reduced by one, the character of "remaining 117" is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The music selection display MC displaying the music title of the music 8 is displayed, and the output of the music 8 is continued from the speaker 120.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of operating the operation key unit 190 while the music selection display MC is displayed.

In the examples so far, the operation key unit 190 is not operated even if the music selection display MC is displayed, but in the example shown in FIG. 39, the operation key unit 190 is operated. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 38 will be mainly described, and overlapping description may be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the last special symbol symbol variation display capable of maintaining the time-saving gaming state is displayed. Is finished.

In FIG. 39 (b), as in FIG. 30 (j), the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state (special figure low-probability normal-figure low-probability state), and the time-saving medium lamp TL is turned off, so that the accuracy is high. The middle lamp HL is also off. Further, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a dedicated background in which the character display of one-shot reversal is displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 1 is displayed has started. Music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 39 (c), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), the music title of the music 2 is displayed on the music selection display MC, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from pressing the upper button 191, the music 2 is displayed from the speaker 120. Output starts. That is, the music is determined after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after operating the operation key unit 190. If the operation key unit 190 is operated again before the lapse of a predetermined time, the music title of the music on the music selection display MC is also changed, and the music output from the speaker 120 is also changed. Further, even before the lapse of a predetermined time, the music may be determined if the OK button of the operation key unit 190 is pressed.

In FIG. 39 (e), a reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in the following figure (f), it develops into a super reach, and the speaker 120 replaces the newly set music 2 with a super reach. Dedicated music A is output. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (g), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability variation jackpot (special figure B) is won. Then, the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

In FIG. 39 (h), the opening effect of the big hit game is started. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection determination display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the music title of the music 6 is displayed on the music selection determination display MD. Further, the music 6 is output from the speaker 120. Music 6 is a music that does not suggest a setting. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (h) displays a right-handed first display RH1 and a right-handed second display RH2, and the speaker 120 "strikes to the right" together with the music 6. The right-handed notification voice is also output.

In FIG. 39 (i), the first round is started, and the right-handed notification sound is not output from the speaker 120, and only the music 6 is output. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the first round has started displays a musical piece moving image corresponding to the musical piece 6 output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation in which the bancho of the learning style decides a pose according to the music 6, and the lyrics of the music 6 are also displayed. Further, also in FIG. 39 (i), the music selection determination display MD is displayed.

In FIG. 39 (j), the second round has started. In the example of FIG. 39, the character display "Aim for V" is displayed, and although the music moving image is continuously displayed, the music selection determination display MD disappears and is hidden. The speaker 120 continues to output the music 6.

In this example, the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch VS and the V winning notification is not performed, and in FIG. 39 (k), the end effect of the big hit game is started. In the end effect of the jackpot game, the display of the music selection determination display MD is resumed. Further, the music 6 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the big hit game, and is also output in this end effect.

In FIG. 39 (l), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of the special figure 2 is digested, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Since there was no V prize, the probability change state was not reached, and the high probability middle lamp HL remained off.

Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the music 6 is selected by lottery, the display of the music selection display MC in which the music name of the music 6 is displayed is started in the time-saving game state. From the speaker 120, the music 6 is continuously output from the big hit game.

In FIG. 39 (m), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (n), the music name of the default music 1 is displayed on the music selection display MC, and when the music 1 is determined after the lapse of a predetermined time, the output of the music 1 is output from the speaker 120. It will be started. In this example, the music 7 and 8 are not released, and the music 6 is returned to the music 1.

In addition, when a specific operation (for example, a pressing operation of the lower button 192, a long pressing operation of the OK button, etc.) is performed during a specific period (for example, the period of the opening effect during the big hit game shown in FIG. 39 (h)), it is predetermined. Even if the condition is not satisfied, the music 6 may be released. Even in this case, it is desirable not to release the setting suggestion music.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game started without satisfying a predetermined condition.

FIG. 40 (a) is different from the previous examples of FIG. 38, in which the symbol variation display of the special figure is completed in the non-time saving game state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is equipped with “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on a white background without a pattern representing a non-time saving gaming state. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed, and among them, the first hold icon h11 is a gold display mode. Further, the short-time medium lamp TL, the right-handed indicator lamp RL, and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL are all turned off. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 40 (a).

In FIG. 40 (b), the variable display of the reserved symbol represented by the first reserved icon h11 in the gold display mode is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Has been done. Further, in the variable icon display area 280, the variable icon h0 in the gold display mode is displayed, and a normal notice is given.

In FIG. 40 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in FIG. 40 (d), the music A has evolved into a super reach, and the music A dedicated to the super reach is output from the speaker 120 instead of the music 1. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (e), the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 3R probability variation jackpot (special figure a) is won. There is. Since the big hit here is not the big hit in the special figure 2 remaining hold, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, in this example, this big hit is the first hit, and the predetermined condition has not been satisfied even once after the power is turned on (after the RAM is cleared).

In FIG. 40 (f), the opening effect of the big hit game is started. Since the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music selection display MC is displayed instead of the music selection determination display MD. In the music selection display MC shown in FIG. 40 (f), the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and the music 1 is output from the speaker 120 together with the voice output of the right-handed notification.

In FIG. 40 (g), the first round is started, and the right-handed notification sound is not output from the speaker 120, and only the music 1 is output. Further, on the decorative pattern display device 208, a music selection display MC displaying the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and a music movie in which the main character's lord appears according to the music 1 is displayed. ..

As shown in FIG. 40 (h), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 four times in the middle of the first round. In the music selection display MC, the display is switched in the order of the music title of music 2, the music title of music 3, the music title of music 4, and the music name of music 5, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (i) has "music 5". The music selection display MC in which the music title of the music is displayed is displayed, and the music video with the lyrics display corresponding to the music 5 is displayed. Further, the music 5 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 40 (j), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (k) where the second round is started, a music selection display MC displaying the music name of "music 1" is displayed, and a music with lyrics display corresponding to the music 1 is displayed. The video is displayed. That is, it returns to the music 1 that was output in the first round, and here, the output of the music 1 is restarted from the continuation of the music 1 that was output halfway in the first round. However, each time a song is selected, it may be output from the beginning of the song.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (l) at which the third round of the final round is started, the music selection display MC disappears and the music cannot be selected. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display a musical piece moving image with lyrics displayed according to the musical piece 1. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 40 (m), the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified of the V prize that the V prize has been won, and the music movie is hidden. Also, the music selection display MC remains hidden. On the other hand, the music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 40 (n), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the display of the music selection display MC has been resumed. Further, the music 1 is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 40 (o), the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the hold of the special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town showing the time-saving game state. The variable display of decorative patterns has started. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the music selection display MC in which the music title of "music 1" is displayed is continuously displayed, and the music 1 is also displayed from the speaker 120 from the jackpot game to the non-time saving game state or the time saving game. It is continuously output without interruption when switching to the state. In addition, when switching from the big hit game to the non-time saving game state or the time saving game state, even if there is no change in the music, the music is not continuously output, and the music is restarted after being interrupted once, or the non-time saving. When the game state is switched to the game state or the time-saving game state, the music may be output again from the beginning.

In addition, the predetermined condition regarding the music selection was that the jackpot was won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state. During the game, music can be selected as shown in FIG. 40 (h) and FIG. 40 (j), and during the 2R jackpot jackpot game, music cannot be selected as shown in FIG. 38 (f). May be good.

The present invention can also be applied to a so-called type-two-type mixer in which a small hit is made in a short-time gaming state and a big hit is obtained by entering the V winning area in the attacker.

In the above description,
"A game table provided with a notification means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, etc.].
In the non-time-saving gaming state, the notification means is a first notification for prompting the launch of a game ball toward the first game area [for example, a left-handed notification such as a left-handed first display LH1 or a left-handed second display LH2]. ] May be executed,
When the first condition [for example, there are four remaining reservations in FIG. 2] is satisfied when the notification means shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state.
The first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining reservation of the special figure 2 being digested in the non-time-saving gaming state is performed. It is a period (pull-back period), and the first notification is not executed in the period of FIG. 30 (j) to FIG. 30 (o) to FIG. 31 (d)] [for example, FIG. 30 (l)]. ,
After the end of the first period, the first notification [for example, the left-handed first display] is performed over the second period [for example, the left-handed notification period of FIGS. 31 (e) to 31 (h)]. LH1 left-handed notification] is executed.
A game table that features that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

In the second period, the first notification is always executed.

Further, the notification means may not execute the first notification even when the power is cut off during the first period and then the power is restored.

also,
"The notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] has a second condition [for example, there is only one remaining hold of special figure 2] when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state. If so,
In the third period [for example, the period of FIG. 32 (j) to FIG. (M)] shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first notification is given. [For example, FIG. 32 (l)],
After the end of the third period, the first notification [for example, the left-handed notification period of FIG. 32 (n) to FIG. (O) to FIG. 33 (b)]. For example, the left-handed first display LH1 left-handed notification] is executed.
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even in this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

also,
"When the notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] does not satisfy the first condition and the second condition when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, Special Figure 2 When the remaining hold is 0], the second period [for example, the period of FIG. 34 (j) to FIG. (L)] after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state. When one notification [for example, left-handed notification of the left-handed first display LH1] is executed [for example, it may be executed as in the example shown in FIG. 34, and the special figure 2 remaining hold is 2 or 3 In some cases, the left-handed first display LH1 may not be executed immediately].
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even in this game table, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the game situation.

also,
"A second starting port [for example, the second special drawing starting port 232] arranged in the second gaming area [for example, the right side area], and
A second symbol display means [for example, the second special symbol display device 214] capable of executing the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display of special figure 2] based on the winning of the second start port. When,
Equipped with
The notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] provides a second notification [for example, right-handed first display RH1] for prompting the launch of a game ball toward the second game area in the time-saving gaming state. It ’s something to do,
The notification means performs a hold number notification indicating the hold number of the second symbol variation display [for example, a number notification in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 at the lower left of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284]. It ’s something to do,
The notification means is executing the final second symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "last second symbol variation display") in the time-saving gaming state [for example, FIGS. 30 (f) to 30 (f) to the same figure ( In h)], a third notification [for example, right-handed second display RH2] is executed, which is a notification mode different from the second notification and prompts the launch of the game ball toward the second game area. It is a thing
The notification means executes the third notification in the final second symbol variation display, while the pending number has been executed before the last second symbol variation display is started. It is executed without changing the notification mode of the notification [for example, FIGS. 30 (f) to 30 (h)].
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the final second symbol variation display, the player loses unless the hold of the second symbol variation display is stored. First, since the hold number notification is executed without changing the notification mode, the player can confirm the hold number of the second symbol variation display. Then, by executing the special notification such as the third notification, it is possible to emphasize the launch of the game ball toward the second gaming area and prevent the player from losing money.

It should be noted that the notification means may always execute the third notification during the execution of the final second symbol variation display.

Further, in the non-time-saving gaming state after the end of the second period, the notification means said that the game ball was detected to be launched toward the second gaming area. It executes one notification,
In the first period, the notification means does not execute the first notification even if it is detected that the game ball is being launched toward the second game area.

also,
"The first starting port [for example, the first special drawing starting port 230] arranged in the first gaming area [for example, the left side area] and
The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212] capable of executing the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display of special figure 1] based on the winning of the first start port. When,
Equipped with
The first symbol display means may not stop and display the time-saving symbol [for example, the time-saving symbol (special symbol D) shown in FIG. 5 (b)] in the first symbol variation display in the non-time-saving gaming state. It is a thing
The second symbol display means may stop and display the time-saving symbol in the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, FIG. 37 (e)].
When the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol variation display, the game shifts to the time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game [for example, FIG. 37 (f)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even in the same non-time saving game state, in the second symbol variation display, if there is a hold, the time saving symbol may be won, and the time saving game state is returned again as compared with the case where there is no hold. There is a high possibility of migration. Therefore, the first notification is not performed to prevent the player from unnecessarily aiming at the first starting port.

In addition, a look-ahead notice means capable of executing a look-ahead notice suggesting that the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is provided.
In the look-ahead notice means, a hold that is digested before the hold of the second symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") that stops and displays the time-saving symbol is won as a kind of jackpot. If so, the look-ahead notice may not be executed for the second hold.

Further, when the hold to be digested before the second hold is won in the probabilistic jackpot, even if the second hold is digested after the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot, the time saving based on the time saving symbol is used. It may not shift to the gaming state.

That is, after the end of the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot, the game shifts to the time-saving game state, and even if the second hold is exhausted, the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed. Further, when the second hold is exhausted, the time-saving gaming state is already in place.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means into the gaming area is discharged from the gaming area and can be supplied to the launching means again. In addition, a display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table, and is shown in FIG. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown are not provided.

As described above, this enclosed pachinko machine encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball inside the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball, and the ball is paid out. It may be performed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotary body gaming machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 41. Here, FIG. 41 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 41), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 is used. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, an appropriate number of each symbol is printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a downhill winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize in some winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. The information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may have a curved surface.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

It should be noted that the predetermined conditions for selecting music are that if the slot machine 1000 is shown in FIG. 41, the bonus of the n consecutive villas is won, and that a specific symbol (for example, 7 red symbols) is aligned and a prize is awarded. Winning a bonus with all the symbols on the winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), winning the AT of the 10th consecutive villa, winning the predetermined number of sets or adding the predetermined number of games, predetermined It is possible to win an AT that has the same role as.

Further, the jackpot gaming state in the examples shown in FIGS. 30 to 40 is a bonus gaming state, an ART state, an AT state, and the like in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41. In addition, the time-saving gaming state becomes the ART state, the AT state, etc. when the jackpot gaming state is set to the bonus gaming state, and becomes the AT state, the RT state, etc. when the jackpot gaming state is set to the ART state. ..

Further, the reset timing of the music release information was when the RAM was cleared, but it may be reset when the power failure recovery is performed across the dates, or even if the dates are crossed, a certain specific time (for example, for example). It may not be reset if the power is restored by 6 am).

Further, when the power is restored from the power failure, the preset initial music is selected as the selected music.

In the above description,
"A game console equipped with a sound output means [for example, a speaker 120] capable of outputting music.
The sound output means can output a musical piece in a first advantageous state [for example, a big hit game state, a bonus game state, an ART state].
The first advantageous state is an advantageous state for the player.
Predetermined conditions [For example, winning a big hit in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 performed as a result of the remaining hold of special figure 2 being digested in the non-time saving game state, and as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the big hit game, the big hit again. There is a hold to become (so-called hold consecutive villa), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds or the jackpot with the maximum number of time reductions), the most for the player Winning a disadvantageous jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or a jackpot with the smallest number of time reductions), winning a jackpot at the nth consecutive villa, winning a bonus at the nth consecutive villa, specifying To win a bonus with all the symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), to win a bonus with all the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row), and to win the AT of the 10th consecutive villa. , Satisfaction of the predetermined AT start condition (for example, winning in addition to a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT having a predetermined combination, etc.)] is not satisfied. The first number of songs that can be output by the sound output means in an advantageous state [for example, "5" in FIG. 35 (a), "5 or more and 8 or less" if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once (FIG. 36). (See)] and the number of second songs that the sound output means can output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, determined by lottery as shown in FIG. 35 (b). Different from one song "1"],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, when the predetermined condition is achieved, the number of songs is different from that when the predetermined condition is not achieved, so that the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved is enhanced, and the game can be played. You can improve your interest.

also,
"The number of the second music [for example, 1] is smaller than the number of the first music [for example, 5 or more and 8 or less].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By reducing the number of songs that can be output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved is enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

also,
A display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] is provided.
The sound output means can output music even in the second advantageous state.
The second advantageous state is an advantageous state for the player, which is different from the first advantageous state [for example, when the time-saving gaming state and the first advantageous state are the bonus gaming states. ART state or AT state, AT state or RT state when the first advantageous state is ART state],
The display means does not display a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means in the second advantageous state [for example, FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (i) and 38 (k). -Same figure (o)],
In the first advantageous state, the display means displays a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means [for example, FIGS. 38 (g) to 40 (h), 40 (g)). -Same figure (k)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, in the first advantageous state, the game can be excited by displaying the moving image together with the output of the music, and in the second advantageous state, the game can be excited by the output of the music, for example. It is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect of notifying whether or not to win the prize from being disturbed.

also,
"Game information by the music output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, a set value, a jackpot as a result of pre-reading during the hold during the jackpot game, the jackpot again. It is possible to suggest that there is a hold (so-called hold consecutive villas), the type of hit (whether or not there is a probability change), and the number of consecutive villas].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by suggesting game information when the predetermined condition is achieved, it is possible to increase the motivation to play the game to achieve the predetermined condition.

The game information may be information about a game that the player cannot normally know.

also,
"The operation means [for example, the operation key unit 190] is provided.
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music output by the sound output means can be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIG. 40 (h) and FIG. j)], in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output by the sound output means cannot be selected by using the operation means [for example, FIG. 39 (h)). The music selection decision display MD shown in the above is displayed and cannot be selected].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the music cannot be selected in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, so that the music is a special music (a music suggesting information). It is possible to suggest that, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the display means may be provided, and the display means may be capable of displaying a music selection display representing a music that can be selected by the player.

Further, the display means does not display the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The display means may be capable of displaying the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

Further, the display means does not display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the second advantageous state.
The display means may display the lyrics of the music output from the sound output means in the first advantageous state.

When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first music [for example, music 7 or music 7 or] can be selected by the player in a certain advantageous state [for example, a big hit game state or a time-saving game state] after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Music 8] is added, and the first music can be selected in the first advantageous state, but the first music cannot be selected in the normal gaming state [for example, non-time saving gaming state]. May be present [eg, FIG. 36].

In the first advantageous state [for example, the jackpot gaming state] for a part of the period [for example, the round in which the V prize can be obtained (final round)], the music cannot be selected by using the operating means. You may.

A part of the period in the second advantageous state [for example, the time-saving game state] [for example, in the period of super reach, the period in which the symbol of the special figure is stopped and displayed, the period in which the demo display is executed, or the demo display. The period during which the menu display is executed] may also be in a mode in which music cannot be selected using the operation means.

Alternatively, in a part of the period in the normal gaming state [for example, the non-time saving gaming state], the music may not be selected by using the operating means.

Further, when the power is cut off while the music is selected and then the power is restored, the preset initial music may be treated as the selected music.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
Music can be output during a special game (for example, a big hit game).
The number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied is a predetermined number, but the number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied is a specific number.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1,
The specific number is less than the predetermined number,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
It is possible to output a predetermined number of songs even during an advantageous game (for example, a time-saving game).
During the special game, the video according to the type of the music being output is displayed, but during the advantageous game, the video according to the type of the music being output is not displayed.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 3.
The music output during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied may suggest the predetermined information related to the game.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 1 to 4.
The player can select the music to be output using the operating means during the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, but the player outputs the music using the operating means during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Music cannot be selected,
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 6)
The non-time saving game state is
It is a gaming state in which a gaming ball should be launched toward the first gaming area (left area).
The time-saving game state is
It is a gaming state in which a gaming ball should be launched toward the second gaming area (right area).
If the first condition is met when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
The execution of the first hitting method notification (left-handed notification) that notifies that the first game area should be fired in the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state is restricted.
After the end of the first period, the first hitting method notification is executed over the third period.
A game table that features that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console described in Appendix 6
If the second condition, which is different from the first condition, is satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
In the second period, which is shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the execution of the first striking method notification is restricted.
A game table characterized in that after the second period is completed, the first hitting method notification is executed over the third period.

(Appendix 8)
The game console described in Appendix 6 or 7.
If the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
After shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first hitting method notification may be executed over the third period.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 6 to 8.
The first condition is to memorize the first number of special hold.
The second condition is to memorize the special second hold of the second number, which is less than the first number.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 10)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 6 to 9.
When shifting from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state, the second hitting method notification (right-handed notification) is executed to notify that the second game area should be fired.
In the final fluctuation in the time-saving game state,
A third hitting method notification (holding storage notification) that notifies that the second game area should be fired in a mode different from the second hitting method notification that was executed in the fluctuation before the final change. While executing, the number hold is displayed in the same manner as the number hold displayed in the change before the final change.
A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 6 to 10.
In the special game judgment based on the special one in the non-time saving game state, the special symbol (time saving symbol) is not won, while in the special game judgment based on the special two (special figure 2 remaining hold) in the non-time saving game state, the said You may win a special design,
A game table characterized in that when the special symbol is won, the game shifts to a time-saving game state without going through a special game.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. It should be noted that even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements contained only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. are applied to other embodiments, the embodiment, and the modification. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 62, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 62 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 42 to 62, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 42 to 62 are shown. In the description using FIG. 62, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 62 are given priority.
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 42. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member with an opening. A clerk at a game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and the speaker 120, the left frame lamp 122L, the right frame lamp 122R, and the upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. Is attached. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member mounted on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the lower side of the main body 104 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an open lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage dish for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage dish has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate 126 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A ball removal button 130 for ejecting the game ball stored in the ball storage plate 126 from the ball storage plate 126 by the player's operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation on the game board. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices by the operation of the player, and a button lamp 138 that is built in the effect button 136 and emits light of the effect button 136. , A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store is provided. Further, although not shown in FIG. 42, a return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance is also provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140. Further, it also has an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key and an enter button are arranged.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching mallet 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. The launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player. It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

FIG. 43 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 42 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 45). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the ball storage dish 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to reach a predetermined state. Based on the fact that the granting condition is satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the granting condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 45). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 45) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launch of a game ball (FIG. 45). A power switch that configures a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices (see FIG. 45), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The interface unit 606 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 421 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has double-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other, and one-digit 7-segment LEDs modularized on the right side. The bonus ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the bonus ratio (YH) and the continuous bonus ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a red monochromatic LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162. The details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 44A is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions in which the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower. Although not shown in FIG. 44, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side to be the player side may be referred to as the front side or the front side, and the back side may be referred to as the rear side. Or it may be called the back side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. With such a structure, workability can be improved. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to the game board 201 which is a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the game plate 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be referred to as at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area in which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of an effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , A 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124.

FIG. 44B is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board 254.

As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the normal symbol hold lamp 216 are on the main control lamp board 254. , The special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, the special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp RK, the electric support middle lamp RD, the right-handed lamp RM, and the round display lamp RR are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and in this embodiment, it is composed of two vertical LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, they are each composed of two upper and lower stages, for a total of eight LEDs.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games held, and in the present embodiment, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is supposed to be. Further, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). Is possible.

Further, the high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. The electric support lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the blade member 2311 of the electric tulip (electric chew), which will be described later, is in an electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time, while the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened. .. The right-handed display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state, a probability change state, and an electric support state, and is in a state where the player can obtain the benefit by hitting right. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the big hit game related to the big hit when the big hit is made.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 44 (a) is provided with a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in a rollable area of the game ball. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the warp outlet 242b to the stage 244. The stage 244 is provided below and in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is a stage in which the game ball passing through the warp device 242 shows movements such as reciprocating movements and rotational movements. In this stage 244, the game ball reciprocates or rotates, so that the residence time of the game ball becomes long.

Further, in the upper part of the game area 124, the first effect movable body 7 is arranged supported by the main body 104. The first effect movable body 7 is provided with a rectangular light emitting portion 71 in which a plurality of light emitting diodes capable of emitting light in full color are arranged. Further, on the right side of the game area 124, a second effect movable body 8 imitating a person's right arm is arranged. The second effect movable body 8 is composed of an upper arm portion 81 and a forearm portion 82, and has an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm portion at the shoulder position and a forearm portion (not shown) that rotates the forearm portion at the elbow position. It includes a motor and a finger motor (not shown) that bends and stretches five fingers. The second effect movable body 8 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a movable area by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), a part of the upper part of the game area 124 is covered with the decorative cover 203. Further, the upper right portion of the game area 124 is covered with the decorative upper right cover 205, and the normal drawing start opening 228 is arranged at the back (rear side) of the decorative upper right cover 205. The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Balls that have passed through the starting port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they enter, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prize balls are paid out and the entered game balls are ejected. It may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

Further, in the present embodiment, one first special drawing start port 230 is arranged in the lower center of the game board 200. A star-shaped effect lamp 206 is arranged directly below the first special drawing start port 230. Further, a sub liquid crystal display device 207 is arranged on the left side of the first special drawing start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into the first special figure start port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 43 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls is stored as a prize ball. At the same time as discharging to the plate 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Further, in the present embodiment, the attacker unit 23 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 124, and the attacker unit 23 is also separately provided with the first special drawing start port of the electric chew type. Hereinafter, the first special figure start port 230 provided in the lower center of the game board 200 is referred to as the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the first special figure start of the electric chew type separately provided in the attacker unit 23. The mouth may be referred to as the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 to distinguish between the two. The blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in a state of advancing, and is in a state where it is difficult to win a prize, and in a state of retreating, a state in which a prize is easily won. In the following description, the advancement of the blade member 2311 may be referred to as closing, and the retracting may be referred to as opening. Further, a light emitting diode (not shown) capable of emitting full color light is also arranged in the attacker unit 23.

Further, in addition to the first special figure starting port (variable) 231, the attacker unit 23 is also provided with a second special drawing starting port 232, a first variable winning opening 234, and a second variable winning opening 235. These variable winning openings may be referred to as "attackers". The first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening (attacker) 234 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, forms a ball passage in the advanced state, and is in a difficult-to-win state, and in the retracted state, the winning is easy. In the following description, when the first door member 2341 is advanced, it may be referred to as closing, and when it is retracting, it may be referred to as opening. The second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening (attacker) 235 also advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, but unlike the first door member 2341, in the advanced state, it is in a state where it is easy to win while forming a ball passage, and it retreats. If you do, it will be difficult to win a prize. In the following description, when the second door member 2351 is advanced, it may be referred to as opening, and when it is retracting, it may be referred to as closing.

The first special drawing start port (fixed) 230 provided in the lower center shown in FIG. 44 (a) has a configuration in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter when hitting to the right due to its arrangement. .. On the other hand, in the central portion of the above-mentioned stage 244, there is a special route 244a that makes it easy for the ball that has reached the stage 244 to enter the first special figure start opening (fixed) 230 provided in the lower center of the game board 200. It is provided. It is also possible to aim at the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 from the left side without going through the stage 244. Therefore, the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 is a starting port where a ball can be expected to enter by hitting left.

Further, although not shown, the game area 124 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings. When a ball enters the general winning opening, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening has won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls is used as a winning ball. Discharge to the ball storage dish 126. The ball that has entered the general winning opening is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In addition, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged in the game area 124, and any winning opening or start is provided at the bottom of the inner rail 204. An out port 240 is provided for guiding the ball that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the ball storage dish 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the hammer. And, it is launched into the game area 124 through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and wins a prize at various winning openings or starting openings. The out port 240 is reached without winning a prize at the start port or only by passing through the start port 228. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of a game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharging ball receiving port. Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 45. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (it is assumed that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, in the basic circuit 302, signals output by various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and a ball storage tray full tank sensor, are output. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc., and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the second special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example,). , General figure hold lamp 216, special figure 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp RD, right-handed lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.) Drive circuit 330 and a drive means for driving a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2311 of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 as an ordinary electric accessory, or a first variable prize as a special electric accessory. It is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the first door member 2341 of the port 234 and the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning port 235. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure starting ports 230 and 231, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output to. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, 231 and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1. Stored in the register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won a prize in the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly obtained. It is latched and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but the payout control unit 600 is configured so as not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. The game board lamp 442 includes a star-shaped effect lamp 206, a light emitting unit 71 provided in the first effect movable body 7, a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, and the like. There is. Further, the game table frame lamp 452 includes a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, an upper frame lamp 122U, a button lamp 138 for emitting the effect button 136, and the like.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a first effect movable body 7 on the upper side shown in FIG. 44 (a), and a second on the right side. A drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of various effect devices such as the effect movable body 8, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 is a basic circuit based on detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of various effect devices and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons constituting the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. VDP (VDP) that reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub liquid crystal display device 207. It is equipped with a video display processor) 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct the launch permission or stop, and the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the amount, the control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the launching rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the ball storage dish 126 to the launching device 110. Take control.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current and converts it into a predetermined voltage to control each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. Explain the types of special drawings and general drawings.

On condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the starting ports 230 and 231 of the special figure 1, the variable game of the special figure 1 is started, and the ball is inserted at the starting port 232 of the special figure 2. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks a part of the lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) among the eight lamps. "Variable display" (special figure variable game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks a part of the lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) among the eight lamps. 2 variable display ”(special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed multiple times in succession.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specification for starting the variable display of the special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 regardless of whether or not one special figure performs the variable display of the other special figure (such as this). Pachinko machines with various specifications are sometimes called "simultaneous fluctuation machines").

FIG. 46A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 46 (a), four types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure D", are shown. In FIG. 46A, a white portion in the figure indicates a lamp that is turned off, and a black portion indicates a lamp that is turned on.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of Special Figure 1. "Special figure A" is a 6-round (R) normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning opening 234 opens, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. Further, "special figure B" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened to shift to a big hit game state, and control is performed after the big hit game is completed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared. In addition, a big hit may be prepared in which it is practically difficult to win a prize in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win a prize due to a short opening).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether it is a normal big hit or a probable variable big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state, and the special figure changes between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state. The times are configured to vary greatly. In addition, after the end of the big hit game, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state and is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low-probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of a normal-figure variable game is 0/100 (that is, it is always out of order) in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-electric support state), whereas the normal-figure high-probability state (electric support state). ) Will rise to 100/100 (that is, it will always be a hit). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2311 is more likely to open than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2311, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is reduced. This is because there may be a disadvantage. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either of the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of electric chew opening is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is increased, and the electric support state (time saving state) is established. May be good. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 changes into a winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 50 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the non-electric state is maintained at the 51st time. It shifts to the support state (normal low probability state). On the other hand, if a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure B”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. Further, when the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, for the special figure 1, a small hit symbol (“special figure C”) is prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. In the case of a small hit with "Special Figure C", the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens for 0.06 seconds 12 times after the symbol is stopped. The opening time and the number of times of opening the second door member 2351 can be appropriately set. In the small hit game, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) into the second variable winning opening 235, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the small hit game Is completed, and the second door member 2351 is not opened after that. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the machine is a simultaneous variable machine, there may be a situation in which the special figure 2 is displaying the fluctuation when the special figure 1 becomes a small hit and the game shifts to the small hit game. .. In this case, when a small hit occurs in Special Figure 1, the variable display of Special Figure 2 is interrupted, and when the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the variable display of Special Figure 2 is restarted. In addition, when the special figure 1 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 2 is in a variable display, or when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 1 changes and displays. In this case, if one of the special maps becomes a big hit, the variable display of the other special map is forcibly terminated, the result of the variable display is discarded, and the result of the deviation is displayed. It will be.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure D" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 46 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 46 (b), five types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure e" are shown, and three kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure a" to "special figure e". Figure c "). "Special figure a" is a 6R normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game ends, a control state. Is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. Further, "special figure b" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened to shift to a big hit game state, and control is performed after the big hit game is completed. The state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. The "special figure c" is a 10R probability variable big hit symbol, and when the "special figure c" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234 opens to the big hit game state, and after the big hit game is completed, The control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. It should be noted that a big hit may be prepared in which it is practically difficult to win a prize in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win a prize due to a short opening). Further, in the special figure 2, three types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared.

Further, also in the special figure 2, a small hit symbol (“special figure d”) is prepared in addition to the big hit symbol. In the case of a small hit with "special figure d", the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens for 0.06 seconds only once after the symbol is stopped. Here, when compared with the small hit symbol of Special Figure 1 (“Special Figure C”), the small hit in Special Figure 1 (special figure 1) is compared with the case of small hit in Special Figure 2 (“Special Figure d” is stopped and displayed). When "Fig. C" is stopped and displayed), more game balls can easily enter the second variable winning opening 235, and more balls can be obtained. In other words, the game is such that the small hit of the special figure 2 does not give the ball, but the small hit of the special figure 1 gives the ball. The opening time and the number of times of opening the second door member 2351 can be appropriately set.

Further, also in Special Figure 2, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure e" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 46 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The ball has won a prize in the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230, the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 or the special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 or the special figure 1 start port. (Variable) On condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the (variable) 231 or the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 2 start port 232. , "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... In some cases, "variable display of decorative symbols" is performed, in which the display is switched in the order of "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> .... That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state and the electric support state in which the special figure 1 is mainly displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the variable display in the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly used. In the probabilistic state in which the variation display is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only in the fourth symbol and the second special symbol display device 214, which will be described later. In the probabilistic state, even if the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the first special symbol display device 212.

A mode other than the case where the 1st special figure display device 212 confirms and notifies the 6R probability variation jackpot in the normal game state or the electric support state, and the case where the 2nd special figure display device 214 confirms that the 6R probability variation jackpot is in the probability variation state. In the case of notifying a big hit or a small hit, there are 3 decorative symbols having the same numbers other than "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of the decorative patterns arranged side by side (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot (“Special Figure B”) is definitely notified by the first special figure display device 212 in the normal game state or the electric support state, the 10R probability variation jackpot (“Special Figure B”) is confirmed by the second special figure display device 214 in the probability variation state. In the case of confirming that it is "special figure c"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol D" or "special symbol e", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol (in the case of "decorative symbol variable display"). There is also.). The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 46 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal map of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public map A" and a missed symbol "Public map B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 alternately lights two LEDs arranged one above the other. Perform "variable display" (normal map variable game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the hit symbol "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 46 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the lamp to be turned off, and the black-painted portion indicates the location of the lamp to be turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special symbol symbol determination random value, and the like. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for the special figure. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for a special figure divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of a win / fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random number value storage area for ordinary figures is also prepared. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in the winning order (holding order) one set for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 47 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission and initial value setting etc. are performed. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step is returned to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 43 is operated by a store clerk or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that this is the case (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of the settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when this power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting (main setting) in the stack pointer, initialization of all storage areas of RAM 308, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 43 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has been restored to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 45 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned pre-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that), the general winning opening, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special drawing start opening (fixed) 230, and the first special drawing starting opening (variable). ) 231 and the second special figure start port 232, or the normal figure start port 228 is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that the ball has entered the general winning opening, these variable winning openings 234, 235, and these starting openings 230, 231, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry into the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first 1 It is determined that there is a prize in the special figure start port (fixed) 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent prize in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 is performed. However, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 is not performed. Branch to subsequent processing. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. Special figure Update the random number counter to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the normal figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I'll keep it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a variable / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter is updated. In this prize opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 45 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal map state update process in the middle of the normal map fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 alternately blink on and off. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of a normal map (a variable game of a normal map).

In addition, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the normal map fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal map display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a display mode of a lost symbol. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for making various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal diagram A shown in FIG. 46 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 46 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this solenoid hit flag is on, in the solenoid state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the solenoid stop time changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 A solenoid for driving the opening / closing of the blade member 2311 of the first special drawing start port (variable) 231 (various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 45) is set in the setting area while the normal drawing is in operation and for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the attacker unit has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the closed state is sent to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 45) for driving the opening / closing of the blade member 2311 of the first special drawing start port (variable) 231 provided in the 23. At the same time as outputting, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal map state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be non-operating. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the opening / closing control of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure is on hold. When the number of fluctuating games is 1 or more, the result of the fluctuating game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area. A hit determination is made to determine whether or not, and if a winner is to be won, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeating the lighting / extinguishing of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big hit flag, a 6R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is turned on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the normal map probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure c and 6R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 46 (b) are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off. In case, special figure b, 6R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure a, small hit flag is on, special figure d, loss. When the flag is on, the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed so as to be in each mode of the special figure e, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 10R probable change big hit symbol (special figure e), a 6R probable change big hit symbol (special figure b), a 6R normal big hit symbol (special figure a), and a small hit symbol (special figure a). Figure d) and one of the lost symbols (special symbol e) are confirmed and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous variable machine, the variable display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the variable display of the special figure 2, but the variable display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, the lottery result is discarded and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of the special figure 2, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1. Will be done. Further, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the special figure 2 is displayed. The progress of the variation display time of the special figure 1 is interrupted at the timing of the small hit symbol display, and as a result, from the start of the variation display of the special figure 1 to the stop display of the symbol of the special figure 1. The time is extended by the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 to the end of the small hit game.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in the special figure 2, the symbol for stopping the variable display while additionally storing the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or a solenoid for opening / closing drive the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 (until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234) (shown in FIG. 45). A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the open state (retracted state) is output to (a part of various solenoids 332), and information indicating the opening period is output to the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the closed state (advanced state) is output to the timer for opening / closing the opening / closing drive of the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 45). At the same time, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 6 rounds in this exemplary embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, in order to set to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed, the effect standby is performed in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the period. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal map, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal map is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal map. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the fluctuation time of the variable game of the normal map is shorter than that in the low-probability state of the normal map (normal map variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special drawing 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer (extension of the electric chew) than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the blade member 2311 is more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of the first variable winning openings 234 will be entered during the big hit game, and the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 until the game ball enters. There is a problem that many game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit (number of balls out) increases and the gambling property increases, and this is to solve this problem. Is. In this embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is "1", the number of balls released during the big hit game does not substantially increase, so that the big hit You may leave the time saving flag on even during the game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

The example of the big hit game using the first variable winning opening 234 has been described above, but the same applies to the small hit game using the second variable winning opening 235.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. In the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the variable game of special figure 2 is not performed, the state of special figure 2 is not operating, and neither the big hit game of special figure 1 nor the big hit game of special figure 2 is performed. And, on the condition that the number of the reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area are used. Is executed. In the lottery process related to the special figure 1, the variable game of the special figure 1 is not performed, the state of the special figure 1 is not operating, the big hit game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not performed, and the game is suspended. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of special figure 1 variable games is 1 or more. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 can start the variable game regardless of whether or not the special figure 2 is in the variable game, and in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 is in the variable game. It is configured to be able to start a variable game with or without it (simultaneous variable machine).

The notification of the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231. And in the time saving state, the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special drawing 1 starting port (variable) 231 is notified of the lottery based on the winning of the special drawing 2 starting port 232. It is given priority over the notification of the lottery result. However, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the probable change state becomes a big hit, the special figure 2 start is performed in parallel with the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 2 start port 232, or once. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is executed. May occur. In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state is a big hit, the lottery is based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231. In parallel with the notification of the lottery result, or by interrupting the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 to start special figure 2. Notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 may be executed.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 receives the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the special figure 2 winning random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area and specially. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, by performing the above-mentioned special figure state update process and special figure-related lottery process independently for special figure 1 and special figure 2, a plurality of special figures are configured to be changed at the same time. It is not limited to the above, and the lottery process or the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure may not be performed according to the state of one special figure. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to display an effect according to the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal game state and the time saving state. On the other hand, the effect display is not performed for the variable display of the special figure 2, and in the probabilistic state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to perform the effect display according to the variable display of the special figure 2, while the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed. Although the effect display is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices for displaying the lottery results of each special figure. May be provided and each lottery result may be displayed separately. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, winning opening winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2) A command sent at the start of fluctuation, which specifies whether one of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed first), special figure hit start command, special figure hit end command, large winning opening opening Command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, setting command, and other information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) ).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the form, when the special symbol change start command is set, the stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, etc. are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 start port (fixed) 230 has won a prize, whether or not the special figure 1 start port (variable) 231 has won a prize, and special figure 2 start. It includes whether or not there is a prize in the mouth 232, whether or not there is a prize in the first variable winning mouth 234, whether or not there is a prize in the second variable winning mouth 235, and the like. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information and so on.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is selected by the various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308. Set the timer number, the information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442,452), and the speaker 120, which are stored in the RAM 308, during the winning effect period. The effect control information, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. are set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442,452), and the speaker 120, which are stored in the RAM 308, during the effect standby period. The effect control information, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a ball storage dish full tank error. do. When a front frame door opening error or a ball storage dish full tank error is detected, a device indicating whether or not a front frame door opening error or a ball storage dish full tank error is present in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set the information. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the first special figure start port (variable) 231 and the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, or via drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the normal figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 47 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as return data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, it is used in the normal figure-related lottery process (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 49. Here, FIG. 49 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, and FIG. 49 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct. Yes, FIG. 49 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the distribution table for determining a special figure.

The table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct is shown in FIG. 49 (a), and is a table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct or not, which is used when determining whether or not the normal figure is correct. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when this hit / fail determination table is used, there is no hit value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of hit is 0%, and the normal figure is shown in the normal figure. In the high probability state, the range in which random numbers can be taken is 0 to 65535, and the winning value is 0 to 65535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). It should be noted that, in the low probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is not activated), the hit may be made with a certain probability (for example, 1%), and in the high probability state of the normal figure (when the time reduction is activated), it is constant. The probability of (for example, 1%) may be different.

The special figure 1 and 2 hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 49 (b) is a table referred to when the hit / fail judgment of the special figures 1 and 2 is performed, and which of the settings 1 to 6 is used. Select the record to be referenced depending on whether it is in the special figure low probability state or the special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (about 1/200) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (about 1/199).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (about 1/193) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (about 1/192).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the big hit is selected with a probability of 363/65536 (about 1/181) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (about 1/180).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the big hit is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (about 1/175) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (about 1/174).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the big hit is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (about 1/146) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (about 1/145).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, the big hit is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (about 1/94) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (about 1/93).

Further, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 is 6580/65536. A small hit that opens and closes 12 times is selected with a probability (about 1/10), and a small hit that opens and closes once is selected with a probability of 6580/65536 (about 1/10) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery shown in FIG. Will be done. It should be noted that the small hit may be prevented from occurring in the special figure 1 and the small hit (the small hit opened 12 times and the small hit opened once) may be generated only in the special figure 2. Further, the probability of a small hit may be made different for each setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special figure high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability state, but they are regarded as almost the same probability. It is set to be probable. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, and the higher the setting, the easier the jackpot is, and the lower the setting, the more difficult the jackpot is. Therefore, the lower the setting, the less likely it is that a big hit will occur, but when the game shifts to a probable change state, the number of small hits tends to occur more than in the high setting, and it may be possible to give different game characteristics.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state in any of the settings, but the major difference is that the variable display time of the special figure 2 is mentioned. Be done. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state is selected, for example, the fluctuation time of 1 to 5 seconds. In the special figure high probability state, when hitting to the right, it is easy for a large number of game balls to enter the second special figure start opening 232, and a large number of fluctuation displays of the special figure 2 can be performed, and as a result. , The mechanism is such that the frequency of small hits increases. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the frequency of small hits increases in the special figure high probability state, so that it may be called "small hit rush". In addition, in the state where there are four (full tanks) of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 2, the time required to digest all the symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 is one time of the special figure 1. Since it takes longer to digest the symbol variation display, it is less likely that a big hit will occur in Special Figure 1. On the other hand, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state, for example, the fluctuation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the special figure low probability state, if you hit right, the frequency of entering the special figure 2 start port 232 and the small hit probability do not change, but the time until the result of the fluctuation display of special figure 2 is displayed is approximately. Since it is every 10 minutes, even if you hit right, it is practically disadvantageous for the player. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state is set to 580 seconds in the case of a miss and a small hit, but the fluctuation time in the case of a big hit is shorter than that, for example. It is set to 227 seconds.

FIG. 49 (c) shows an example of a distribution table for determining a special figure, and as described above, a stop symbol is determined based on the result of determining whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is correct or not. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure (see FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b)) is defined for each hit / fail determination result.

First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / miss determination is a big hit, either "special figure A" or "special figure B" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure A" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and "Special Figure B" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / miss determination is a small hit, "special figure C" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure C" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235 repeats short opening 12 times at the maximum.

Next, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / miss determination is a big hit, any one of "special figure a" to "special figure c" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure a" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234, and "Special Figure b" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. "Special figure c" is a 10R probability variation jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 60/100 for "special figure a", 5/100 for "special figure b", and 35/100 for "special figure c" regardless of the setting.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / miss determination is a small hit, "special figure d" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure d" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235 is short-opened once.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 50A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 50 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. do. In this way, the button lamp 138 that emits the effect button 136, the star-shaped effect lamp 206, the light emitting unit 71 provided in the first effect movable body 7, and the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23. Light emission control is performed.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the upper first effect movable body 7 shown in FIG. 44 (a) or the second effect movable body 8 arranged on the right side in the effect data read in step S309, there is a command to the second effect movable body 8 arranged on the right side. This command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 50B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 50C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other effects random value value update processes are performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 51A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 51 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization process of storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or effect data displayed by the sub liquid crystal display device 207) is stored in the ROM (. Processing such as reading from (not shown) is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 51B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 51 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443 following step S441, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 51 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal display device 207. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. Here, FIG. 52 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 52 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to have a bonus ratio monitor and a setting monitor, and the bonus ratio monitor includes a continuous bonus ratio (RY) and a bonus ratio (). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, the first in the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 234 and winning a prize. In addition, the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls may be used. Further, the bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the first special figure start opening (variable) 231 and the first variable winning opening 234 and the first. 2 The ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 235 and winning a prize). The first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special drawing starting port (fixed) 230, the first special drawing starting port (variable) 231 and the second special drawing starting port 232 with respect to the number of out balls. And may be the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning a prize in the general winning slot.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous bonus ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous bonus ratio is blinked and then displayed. The security signal (RY) is output to. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly carry out the type application test for the gaming machine.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the accessory ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 52 (B), eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch board 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. It is possible to set the appearance rate, the entry rate of the effect mode, and the like.

In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 was not opened in the big hit game, but was opened only in the small hit game, but a big hit opened by the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 was prepared. You may. For example, as the jackpot of the special figure 2, instead of the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234, a 3R jackpot (substantially 1R jackpot) opened by the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235, a 6R jackpot, or the like may be prepared. ..

Further, although the small hits are prepared for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hits may be provided only for the special figure 2. That is, only in the special figure 2, the second variable winning opening 235 may be provided with a small hit that repeats a short opening a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) and a small hit that is short-opened only once. .. By doing so, in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is not in the winning easy state, and the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234 is in the winning difficult state. If the attacker of the 2 variable winning opening 235 is also in a difficult-to-win state, most of the right-handed game balls enter the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 and win a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 variable game. be able to. In particular, since the winning probability of the small hit game is higher than the winning probability of the big hit game (for example, about 10 times higher), the second variable winning opening 235 has a maximum number of times (for example, 12 times). It is easy to win a small hit that repeats short opening, and you can expect to earn a ball in this small hit game.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 42.

FIG. 53 shows the decorative symbol display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. (The same applies to the example shown in FIG. 60).

Further, FIG. 53 shows a star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442.

Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. The background here is a white background with no pattern, but the default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is a white background and there is no pattern, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the number of holds, and the hold of special figure 1 is on the upper left of the display area. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Special Figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the normal map and a hold number display area of the normal map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 1 is matched with the holding number shown in the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2 is the holding lamp 220 of the special drawing 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1, while the symbol of Special Figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a small hit, it is displayed as "△". Is displayed as a stop, and if it is off, it is displayed as a stop with "x". Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol change display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go. The same applies to the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 described above up to the example shown in FIG.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 53 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state is provided with the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 60). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of hold of special figure 1 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1, as well as the number of hold icons of special figure 1, and is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. The number of holdings is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 220 of the special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of the special figure 2. It should be noted that it may also be represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 53A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , Is displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode).

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold icon displayed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42. The hold icons shown in FIG. 54 are all round, but may be transformed from this round shape, for example, may be transformed into a character icon.

FIG. 54 (a) shows the hold icon of the display mode A (default display mode). The display mode A (default display mode) is a non-patterned and white display mode. On the drawing, white is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the left. The hold icon suggests the expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead notice depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display performed by digesting the hold represented by the hold icon. Display mode A (default display mode) suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. It may be suggested that the jackpot expectation is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit in the first place.

FIG. 54B shows the hold icon of the display mode B. The display mode B is a non-patterned and green display mode. On the drawing, green is represented by hatching facing diagonally downward to the right. This display mode B suggests that the jackpot expectation is 25%.

FIG. 54 (c) shows the hold icon of the display mode C. The display mode C is a non-patterned and red display mode. On the drawing, red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This display mode C suggests that the jackpot expectation is 50%.

FIG. 54 (d) shows the hold icon of the display mode D. The display mode D is a display mode composed of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background. In the drawing, yellow is represented by vertical hatching. This display mode D is a display mode that symbolizes the pachinko machine manufacturer (company) that manufactured the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42. That is, when looking at this second display mode, it is a display mode in which many players imagine a specific pachinko machine manufacturer, and it can be said that the display mode is recognizable by the pachinko machine manufacturer. In other words, it is a well-known display mode for use by certain pachinko machine manufacturers. Further, it can be said that it is a display mode peculiar to the pachinko machine manufacturer, and if the pachinko machine manufacturer is the same, it can be said that the same manufacturer pattern is commonly used across a plurality of models. This second display mode is referred to as a maker pattern. There are multiple maker patterns such as animal patterns, animal patterns, plant patterns such as flowers and fruits, fireworks patterns, striped patterns (striped patterns), plaid patterns (lattice patterns), and other geometric patterns. A repeating pattern or the like in which the constituent units of the above are regularly (or irregularly) arranged can be mentioned. Further, since the maker pattern is a pattern expressed using a plurality of colors, it is included in "color" in a broad sense. In some cases, one specific color symbolizes the pachinko machine manufacturer, and in this case, it is the manufacturer's color. This second display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 75%. In addition to the pachinko machine manufacturer, it may be a pachinko machine sales maker (company), and further, it may be a model (model pattern) instead of a maker.

FIG. 54 (e) shows the hold icon of the display mode E. The display mode E is a rainbow-colored display mode. This rainbow color is a mode in which each of the seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) constituting the rainbow is displayed by continuously changing the display color one by one. However, here, it refers to a mode in which the seven colors constituting the rainbow are displayed by dividing the display area at one time. On the drawing, this rainbow color is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This display mode E suggests that the jackpot expectation is 100%. That is, it suggests that the jackpot is confirmed.

In addition, as the display mode F, a display mode that is unpatterned and golden and suggests that the jackpot expectation is 70% may be further prepared.

The higher the expectation of the jackpot, the lower the frequency of appearance of the five display modes described above, but the frequency of appearance is lower in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) than in the display mode E (rainbow color). May be good. That is, the hold icon of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may appear at the lowest frequency.

Further, the five display modes shown in FIG. 54 are also used for the variable icon in which the hold icon changes, and function as a notice (normal notice) of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable icon.

Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 provided directly below the first special figure start port (fixed) 230 can emit light in a light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon.

At the right end of FIG. 54, a light emitting mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is shown. The effect lamp 206 can emit light in a light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) representing the display mode A (default display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in the light emitting mode B (green light emitting mode) representing the display mode B (green display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) representing the display mode C (red display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Further, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light-emitting mode) representing the display mode E (rainbow-colored display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. The rainbow-colored light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206 is a mode in which the seven colors constituting the rainbow are emitted and displayed at once by dividing the light emitting region. These light emission modes also suggest the same jackpot expectations as the display modes of the hold icon and the variable icon.

Strictly speaking, the colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, that is, the colors of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the emission color of the effect lamp 206 are different because the display medium is different. Both colors are also described as being included in the same or similar range.

On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 does not have a light emitting mode indicating the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the effect lamp 206 emits light in the same or similar light emitting mode as the manufacturer pattern. There is no.

As the light emitting mode E, a golden light emitting mode, which suggests that the jackpot expectation is 70%, may be further prepared.

Further, in other display (for example, background display of the title, etc.) on the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 54. In other displays, the expected degree of jackpot may be suggested by the display mode, and the display mode in the other display may be irrelevant to the expected degree of jackpot.

Further, the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (for example, a kimono of a lord) may also be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 54 excluding the second display mode (manufacturer's pattern). Also in the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested depending on the display mode, or may be irrelevant to the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, lamps other than the effect lamp 206 (the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 shown in FIG. 45) can also emit light in a light emitting mode representing other display modes except the second display mode. For example, a light emitting unit 71 provided in the first effect movable body 7 and a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23 can also emit white, green, red, and rainbow colors. As for the rainbow color, in addition to the case where the seven colors constituting the rainbow are emitted and displayed by dividing the emission region at one time, the emission color is continuously changed by one color, and each of the seven colors constituting the rainbow is used. It may be displayed as a light emission. Such rainbow-colored change light emission may be performed as the light emission mode D of the effect lamp 206. The light emitting mode of the lamps other than the effect lamp 206 may also suggest the same jackpot expectation as the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon, and the light emission mode of the lamps other than the effect lamp 206 may indicate the jackpot expectation. It may be a light emitting mode unrelated to.

Further, it is also used as the color of the decorative body except for the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) and the display mode E (rainbow color).

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a decorative body included in the second effect movable body 8.

In the second effect movable body 8 that imitates the right arm of a person, four fingers excluding the fifth finger (pinkie) are decorative bodies. All of these four fingers are difficult to see when bent, but when extended, the decoration provided on the palm side becomes visible.

FIG. 55A shows a second effect movable body 8 in which the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 is extended with the forearm portion 82 lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 55 (a), the decoration A (white) is applied to the palm side of the fourth finger 824. That is, it is painted white.

FIG. 55 (b) shows the second effect movable body 8 in which the third finger (middle finger) 823 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 55 (b), the decoration B (green) is applied to the palm side of the third finger 823. That is, it is painted green.

FIG. 55 (c) shows the second effect movable body 8 in which the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 55 (c), the decoration C (red) is applied to the palm side of the second finger 822. That is, it is painted red.

FIG. 55 (d) shows the second effect movable body 8 in which the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended while the forearm portion 82 is lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 55 (d), the decoration D (gold) is applied to the palm side of the first finger 821. That is, it is painted in gold.

In the second effect movable body 8, nothing is decorated on the palm side of the fifth finger (pinkie) 825.

Strictly speaking, the color displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the color of the decorative body are different in hue because the display medium is different, but these colors are included in the same or similar range. I will explain it as if it were.

Further, each decoration applied to the second effect movable body 8 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, like the hold icon and the variable icon. Therefore, it is suggested that when the 4th finger (ring finger) 824 is extended, the expectation of the jackpot is 5%, and when the 3rd finger (middle finger) 823 is extended, the expectation of the jackpot is 25%. It is suggested that there is, and it is suggested that the expectation of the jackpot is 50% when the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, and the expectation of the jackpot when the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended. Is suggested to be 70%.

On the other hand, as the decorative body, the decorative body of the maker pattern and the rainbow-colored decorative body are not provided. Therefore, in the notice by the decorative body, the high probability notice that the big hit expectation degree is 75% or more is not given.

As with the hold icon and the variable icon, the expected degree of the jackpot is suggested, but the value of the expected degree may be different from the value of the hold icon and the variable icon. For example, decoration B (green) may be 30%, decoration C (red) may be 60%, and decoration D (gold) may be 90%.

Returning to FIG. 53 and continuing the explanation, in FIG. 53 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, they are not actually displayed. The hold icon is also shown with a dotted line.

On the other hand, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 0, and there is no hold of the special figure 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 53 is a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), so that the variation display time of special figure 2 is almost always ( This is because it is extremely long (for example, 500 seconds), and it does not make much sense to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. In the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in FIG. 53, the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 remains 0, and the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 remains the stop display of “x”. ..

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon display area of the special figure on which the display result is easily displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, in the present embodiment, when the control state is a normal gaming state or an electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), the display result of special figure 1 is likely to be displayed as described above. , As shown in FIG. 53 (a), when the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the control state is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). On the contrary, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1, but may be different.

Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 53A is lit in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the fourth symbol → start or deletion of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 53 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280.

In FIG. 53 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second hold icon h12, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A production sound (appearing sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the red hold icon h12 (display mode C). Further, in response to the increase in the hold represented by the red (display mode C) hold icon h12, the number of star-shaped effect lamps 206 that have been emitting light in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode) has increased. It changes to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) showing the display mode of the hold icon h12 representing the hold. That is, the light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206 is a light emitting mode having the same or similar color as the red color of the hold icon h12. The timing of starting the display of the red (display mode C) hold icon h12 and the timing of changing the star-shaped effect lamp 206 to the light emission mode C may be the same, or the hold icon h12 may be earlier. Alternatively, the effect lamp 206 may be faster (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 60). In the figure, the size of the hold icon h12 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are described to the same extent, but in reality, the effect lamp 206 is larger. Therefore, if the effect lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the hold icon h12 and the change timing of the effect lamp 206 is earlier, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red color may be given to the player more strongly. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In FIG. 53 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The red (display mode C) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode).

In FIG. 53 (g), the hold represented by the red (display mode C) hold icon is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the red (display mode C) hold icon is displayed as the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 still continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 53 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 53 (i), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 53 (i), the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 is hidden, and the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is also turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0. In FIGS. 53 to 58, the state in which the effect lamp 206 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching. The timing at which the variable icon h0 is hidden and the timing at which the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is turned off may be the same, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. It may be (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 60). The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 53 (j), it has developed into a super reach. The reach title LT1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (j). The display of the reach title LT1 here is described as "jii reach" in black characters on a green background display. In this reach title LT1, the background is the same color as or similar to green, which suggests the expectation of a big hit with a hold icon or a decorative body, but as shown in FIG. 61, the reach title LT1 of "Ji Reach" As the background color, a color other than green is not selected. That is, it can be said that the type of background color of the reach title LT1 does not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and this green color does not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

An old man's character appears in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (k), and then an animation of the old man's character is displayed. Following the animation display of the grandfather character, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (l) displays the grandfather character that appears to be depressed. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". In FIG. 53 (m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

The star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0, maintains the off state until the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, but until it develops into super reach (FIG. 53 (j)). (Until the timing) The light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued. Alternatively, the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued until the background display is switched and the variation display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner starts to fluctuate (until the timing of FIG. 53 (l)). Further, the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued until the final display of the decorative symbol is performed (until the timing of FIG. 53 (m)).

The example shown in FIG. 53 described above is an example in which the display mode of the hold icon is related to the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442.

FIG. 56 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background in the display of the reach title are related.

FIG. 56 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 56A, one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is in the default display mode. It is displayed. Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 56A is lit in the default light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 56 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 1 to 0, and the display of “−” has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which has been in the display position of the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. When the hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when the variable icon h0 changes, the display mode changes to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the variable icon h0 is displayed. It is displayed in aspect D (manufacturer pattern). The variable icon h0 changed to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) usually functions as a notice. A production sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the display start timing (timing of change in display mode) of the variation icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). Further, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) has a light emitting mode C (red) in response to the appearance of the variable icon h0 in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). The light emission mode) has changed. That is, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode representing the display mode of the variable icon h0, and does not emit light in a light emitting mode having the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). .. More specifically, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emitting mode that suggests an expectation degree lower than the expectation degree of the jackpot suggested by the display mode D of the variable icon h0. The effect lamp 206 may be changed to a light emitting mode (light emitting mode D (rainbow color)) suggesting a higher expectation level than the expectation level of the jackpot suggested by the display mode D of the variable icon h0, or the hold icon. The color may be emitted in a color not used in the or variable icon, or the color used in the hold icon or the variable icon may be emitted in a different emission mode (for example, red). Flashing light, etc.). Further, the timing of the display start of the variable icon h0 and the timing of the change of the effect lamp 206 may be simultaneous, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. (The same applies to the example shown in FIG. 60). In the figure, the size of the variable icon h0 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are described to the same extent as the hold icon, but in reality, the effect lamp 206 is larger. Therefore, if the effect lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the variable icon h0 and the change timing of the effect lamp 206 is earlier, the player first recognizes the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red color, and then the variable icon. By looking at the maker pattern of h0, the expectation of a big hit is further increased. Further, in the effect lamp 206, by not emitting light in the same or similar pattern as the display mode D (maker pattern), the rarity of the maker pattern with high expectation is improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker pattern are improved. Can be enhanced.

In FIG. 56 (c), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 56 (d), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 56 (d), the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is hidden, and the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is also turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 56 (e), it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The reach title LT2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (e). The display of the reach title LT2 here is written in black letters on a rainbow-colored background display as "Swordsman Reach". That is, the same display mode as that used as the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon is also used for the background display of the reach title LT2, suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the first effect movable body 7 arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 is lowered to a position overlapping the display screen on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the rectangular light emitting unit 71 arranged in the first effect movable body 7 is lit in a light emitting mode D (rainbow color light emitting mode) representing a rainbow color. That is, the light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7 emits light in the same or similar light emitting mode as the rainbow color of the background display of the reach title LT2, suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, the background display of the reach title LT2 may be a display mode representing the display mode E (rainbow color), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT2 is the same as or similar to the display mode E (rainbow color), and is one color from the display mode E (rainbow color) used as the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon, for example. Even if the shape of the display area is slightly different, if the player can imagine the display mode E (rainbow color), the display mode is similar to the display mode E (rainbow color) (FIG. 58 (j) described later). The same applies to the reach title LT3 in.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the background color of the reach title LT2 is selected from "white", "red", "maker pattern", and "rainbow color", and is "white". The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the jackpot of "red" is "35%", the expectation of the jackpot of "maker pattern" is "75%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is " It is "100%". That is, unlike the above-mentioned "jii reach", the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested depending on the type of background color of the reach title LT2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the emission color of the light emitting unit 71 is selected from "white", "red", and "rainbow color", and the degree of expectation of a big hit of "white". The expectation of the jackpot of "20%" and "red" is "45%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is "100%". That is, unlike the type of background color of the reach title LT2, the "maker pattern" is not set for the type of emission color of the light emitting unit 71. The background color of the reach title LT2 and the emission color of the light emitting unit 71 may be related (same color) to each other. However, even in that case, the "maker pattern" is not set as the emission color of the light emitting unit 71, and the light is emitted in another color (for example, "golden lighting" or "gold lighting" or "gold lighting" instead of the "maker pattern". Set "blinking red").

In the state shown in FIG. 56 (e), the descending first effect movable body 7 does not overlap with the background display in the reach title LT2, but the position where the first effect movable body 7 overlaps the background display. If the display mode of the background display is the manufacturer's pattern, it will only descend to a position that does not overlap the background display. Further, not only the background display but also the hold icon and the variable icon of the maker pattern are configured so that the effect movable body is not covered.

The display mode of the background display in the reach title LT2 may be a maker pattern, but the light emitting unit 71 in the first effect movable body 7 cannot be lit in the light emitting mode representing the maker pattern, and in addition, It may not be possible to turn on the light even in the light emitting mode expressing the rainbow color. In such a case, the light emitting unit 71 may be left off or may emit light in a light emitting mode representing red.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (f), the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy has started to be displayed. This animation continues until FIG. 56 (i). In FIG. 56 (i), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in the variable display of the decorative pattern reduced in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" Is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (j), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "444". In FIG. 56 (j), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect in which an animation is displayed on a sub-liquid crystal display device by a zone effect.

FIG. 57 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 57A is in a state of being turned off. In addition, FIG. 57 also displays a sub-liquid crystal display device 207 arranged on the left side of the first special drawing start port (fixed) 230. The sub-liquid crystal display device 207 shown in FIG. 57A is in a state where nothing is displayed.

Further, in FIG. 57 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode.

In FIG. 57 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, and the movement of the hold icon is finished. The hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, remains the default display mode in the variable icon display area 280 in this example, the variable icon h0. Is displayed as. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (b), variable display of decorative symbols is started in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The zone title ZT representing the title of the zone effect is displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the symbol, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize. The display of the zone title ZT is written in red letters on an elliptical blue plain background as "training zone". In this zone title ZT, the hold icon or decoration is described as "training zone" in the same or similar color as red, which suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. However, this red color does not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. That is, when this zone title ZT is displayed, it is always described as "training zone" in red letters, and is not described as "training zone" in other colors. Neither the character color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 53 (j) nor the character color of this zone title ZT suggests the expectation of a big hit, but the character color indicates the expectation of a big hit. It may be suggested. On the other hand, the maker pattern only suggests the expectation of a big hit, and may not suggest the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the manufacturer pattern may be used for displaying various settings that can be changed by the player on the game table (for example, the tone from the speaker 120, the game mode, etc.), the number of games played, and the number of consecutive villas of the jackpot. not. When the manufacturer pattern is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit is always suggested, and a big hit can be expected with a fairly high probability. If a manufacturer with a high expectation is used when the expectation of a big hit is not suggested, the player misunderstands that the expectation of a big hit is high and expects it excessively. If the degree is not suggested, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the expectation of the big hit is high by not using the manufacturer's pattern with high expectation, and the expectation is excessively fueled. That can be alleviated.

In FIG. 57 (b) in which the zone title ZT described above is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the animation of the zone effect is started to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, and the main character wearing a red kimono is displayed. An animation of the lord training in swordsmanship is displayed. As shown in FIG. 61 (c), the color of this lord's kimono is selected from "white", "green", "red", and "rainbow color", and is a big hit of "white". Expectation is "20%", "green" jackpot expectation is "30%", "red" jackpot expectation is "45%", "rainbow color" jackpot expectation is "100%" It has become. In addition, it is not displayed in "Manufacturer pattern". This animation continues until FIG. 57 (i). The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 shown in FIG. 57 (b) is changed from 2 to 1, and "-" is displayed in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Has started blinking.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (c), the background display is switched to the background display of the wilderness, which is the background display of the training zone. The background display of this wilderness continues until FIG. 57 (i). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (c), the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c can be visually recognized. .. Further, in FIG. 57 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon h12 is displayed in green (display mode B) at the display position of the second hold icon, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A production sound (appearing sound) represented by a sixteenth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the green (display mode B) hold icon h12. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not turn on in response to the increase in the hold represented by the green (fifth display mode) hold icon h12, and the effect lamp 206 remains off. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped production lamp 206 remains off.

In FIG. 57 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The green (display mode B) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). Also, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 remains off.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The star-shaped production lamp 206 is still off.

In FIG. 57 (g), the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the green (display mode B) hold icon is displayed as the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The star-shaped effect lamp 206, which has been turned off, responds to the start of the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212 based on the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon that has been displayed so far. , The light emission according to the light emission mode B (green light emission mode) representing the green color (display mode B) is started. That is, the effect lamp 206 starts emitting light in the same or similar color as the green color of the variable icon h0. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not start light emission until the fluctuation subject to the notice is started. The timing of the display start of the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 and the timing of the start of light emission by the light emitting mode B of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 may be the same, and the variable icon h0 is earlier. Alternatively, the effect lamp 206 may be faster. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In FIG. 57 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, but in this example, it does not develop into a super reach, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (i), “decoration 4-decoration”. The combination of the missing decorative symbols of "3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "434". Further, the green (fifth display mode) variation icon h0 is hidden when the symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212 ends. The end timing of the symbol variation display and the timing at which the variation icon h0 is hidden may be simultaneous, the symbol variation display may be earlier, or the variation icon h0 may be earlier. Further, the effect lamp 206 is also turned off according to the non-display of the green (display mode B) variation icon h0.

The effect executed by the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (second display means) is not limited to the display of the animation of the zone effect described above, and various effects may be performed. For example, when the decorative pattern that was temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo continuous notice is changed again, the lord is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, and the color of the kimono of the lord suggests the expectation of a big hit. You may. Even in this case, it should not be displayed in "Manufacturer pattern". That is, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 does not display the "manufacturer pattern" under any circumstances. In this way, by not displaying the "maker pattern" in the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the rarity of the maker pattern with high expectation can be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the maker pattern can be enhanced. .. In addition, "pseudo continuous notice" means a notice that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then changed again during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one big hit lottery. It is a notice that the variable display and the temporary stop display may be performed multiple times.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related and further super reach is performed.

FIG. 58 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed.

Further, in FIG. 58A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both are displayed in the default display mode.

Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 58A is lit in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode indicating the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In FIG. 58 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 2 to 1, and the display of “−” has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280.

In FIG. 58 (c), one ball is won in the first special figure start port (fixed) 230, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is increasing. The increased hold icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second hold icon h12, and functions as a look-ahead notice. A production sound (appearing sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the red hold icon h12 (display mode C). Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 53, in this example as well, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode) has a display mode of the hold icon h12 indicating the increased hold. It changes to the light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) representing. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (d), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emitting mode C.

In FIG. 58 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is restarted, and the decorative symbol is variable display. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is 1, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The red (display mode C) hold icon is moved by one and displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). When the hold icon that was red (display mode C) is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon, the display mode changes to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the hold icon h11 is displayed in display mode D (maker pattern). ) Is displayed. A production sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120 according to the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon. On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 that has emitted light in the red light emitting mode (light emitting mode C) maintains the light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode does not change even if the display mode of the hold icon changes. The effect lamp 206, which is more conspicuous than the hold icon, does not change its light emitting mode, but when viewed closely, the hold icon h11 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which has the lowest appearance frequency, is displayed, and the player who discovered this is displayed. May greatly improve the interest of the game. In addition, in response to the change of the hold icon h11 to the display mode D (maker pattern), the effect lamp 206 also has a light emission mode different from the light emission mode representing the display mode D (maker pattern) (for example, light emission mode F (gold color). It may change to the light emitting mode)).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (f), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "814". The hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emitting mode C.

In FIG. 58 (g), the hold represented by the hold icon h11 in the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (g), the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, and the hold icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. In this example, when the hold icon h11 which was the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when the display mode changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to the display mode E (rainbow color). , The variable icon h0 is displayed in the display mode E (rainbow color). The variable icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color) functions as a normal notice for confirming the jackpot. Even in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon here, the effect sound (change sound) represented by the half note is output from the speaker 120. Further, in response to the appearance of the variation icon h0 of the display mode E (rainbow color), the star-shaped effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the light emission mode C so far has a light emission mode D representing the rainbow color (display mode E). It changes to (rainbow-colored light emission mode). That is, the light emission with the same or similar color as the rainbow color of the variable icon h0 is started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of “−” is started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1.

In this example, the display mode is changed from the display mode D (maker pattern) to the display mode E (rainbow color), but the display mode is changed from the display mode D (maker pattern) to the display mode E (rainbow color). It does not change (change rate is 0%), and display mode E (display mode E (default display mode, display mode B, display mode C, display mode F) only from other display modes (default display mode, display mode B, display mode C, display mode F) except display mode D (manufacturer pattern). It may be changed to rainbow color). Alternatively, the rate of change from the above other display mode to display mode E (rainbow color) may be higher than the rate of change from display mode D (maker pattern) to display mode E (rainbow color).

In FIG. 58 (h), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 58 (i), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 are shown. The hold icon display area 281 has disappeared. In FIG. 58 (i), the variable icon h0 of the display mode E (rainbow color) is hidden, but the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode). As described above, the effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light even if the variable icon h0 is hidden, only when the effect lamp 206 emits light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light emitting mode) in which the big hit is confirmed. It should be noted that the effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light or may be turned off based on the result of the effect lottery, regardless of the mode of light emission. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 58 (j), it has developed into a super reach (Den reach). The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color). Further, the reach title LT3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (j). The display of the reach title LT3 here is written in black letters on a rainbow-colored background display as "Den reach". As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the background color of the reach title LT3 is selected from "white", "red", "maker pattern", and "rainbow color", and is "white". The expectation of the jackpot is "20%", the expectation of the jackpot of "red" is "35%", the expectation of the jackpot of the manufacturer pattern is "75%", and the expectation of the jackpot of "rainbow color" is "100". % ”. That is, unlike the above-mentioned "jii reach", the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested depending on the type of background color of the reach title LT3. Further, the light emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light emitting mode), which is the light emitting mode of the effect lamp 206, is the same as or similar to the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT3.

An animation of the character of the palace is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (k), and the character of the palace that looks proud is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (l). ing. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "444". In FIG. 58 (m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 58, the effect lamp 206, which continued to emit light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color) even when the super reach (rainbow color) was started, emits light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow color) even during the super reach. Is continued, and even if the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the light emission is further continued, and the light emission according to the light emission mode D (rainbow color) is continued until the subsequent big hit game start effect is started. The effect lamp 206 may be turned off at the end of the symbol variation display by the first special figure display device 212.

FIG. 59 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the decorative body included in the second effect movable body 8 are related.

FIG. 59 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 59, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is not shown, and instead, a second effect movable body 8 arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. As for the effect lamp, as described above, the light emitting mode may be changed according to the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon to emit light. Alternatively, in this example, the effect lamp 206 may remain off or may remain in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode).

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in FIG. 59 (a), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a default display mode. It is displayed.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59 (a) is located at the initial position. The second effect movable body 8 located at the initial position does not overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the front side, and is located at a position avoiding the display screen, whether it is the upper arm portion 81 or the forearm portion 82. It is facing down.

In FIG. 59 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the hold icon is finished, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also started. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 has changed from 1 to 0, and the display of “−” has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one, and the hold icon h11, which has been in the display position of the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The hold icon h11, which was the default display mode, remains in the default display mode even if it changes to the variable icon h0.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59 (b) remains positioned at the initial position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the button effect is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (c) displays an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the valid period. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the lord. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 or the like. .. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 59 (d), the valid period is reduced, and in the figure (e), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, the success / failure result of the button effect is notified. In this example, if the display mode of the variable icon h0 is ranked up, it is successful, and in the variable icon display area 280 shown in FIG. 59 (f), the variable icon changed from the default display mode to the display mode C (red). h0 is displayed. That is, the button production has been successful, and the normal notice has started. A production sound (change sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120 in accordance with the change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0. Further, the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 may also emit light in a red light emitting mode. If the button effect fails, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change even if the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period. In addition to this, in the button production, a notice of entering the reach state may be notified if it succeeds.

As shown in FIG. 59 (f), even if the success / failure result of the button effect is notified, the second effect movable body 8 is still in the initial position, but as shown in FIG. 59 (g). When the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the second effect movable body 8 starts to operate. That is, the upper arm portion 81 starts to rotate upward, and the forearm portion 82 also starts to rotate upward. As a result, the second effect movable body 8 starts to overlap a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the front side. In the following FIG. 59 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. As a result, the variable icon h0 in the display mode C (red) is also hidden. The upper arm portion 81 of the second effect movable body 8 further rotates upward, and the forearm portion 82 is greatly lifted. The fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, has been moved to the lower right corner and reduced. On the other hand, the mini design on the upper left is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 59 (i), it has developed into a super reach (Den reach). The reach title LT4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (i). The display of the reach title LT4 here is written in black letters on a red background display as "Den reach". Further, in the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59 (i), the forearm portion 82 vibrates while the forearm portion 82 is lifted high, the second finger (index finger) 822 is further extended, and the decoration C (red) is formed. Is visible. This decoration C is a display mode showing red, and is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red), which is the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. The decoration on the second finger (index finger) 822 also suggests the expectation of a big hit. In this example, the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT4 and the display mode of the decorative body of the second effect movable body 8 are the same or similar display modes, but may be different display modes.

Further, the background display of the reach title LT4 may be a display mode representing red. That is, the background display of the reach title LT4 is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red), and has a slightly different hue from the display mode C (red), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon, for example. However, if the player can imagine the display mode C (red), the display mode is similar to the display mode C (red).

An animation of the character of the palace is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (j), and the second effect in which the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended while the forearm 82 is lifted high. The movable body 8 has started a return operation toward the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (k), the character of the palace that looks proud is displayed, and the second effect movable body 8 has returned to the initial position. Further, in the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, but the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (l), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative symbols are combined with the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as stopped. Here, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "444". In FIG. 59 (l), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

FIG. 60 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect similar to the effect in which the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59 operates, and the differences from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 59 will be mainly described. ..

FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (e) are the same as those from FIG. 59 (a) to FIG. 59 (e), and the button effect is executed.

The button effect was also successful in FIG. 60 (f), and the variable icon h0 changed from the default display mode to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. Further, the effect sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120 according to the change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0. The button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 does not emit light in a light emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern, but may emit light in a red light emitting mode.

In the following FIG. 60 (g), as in FIG. 59 (g), the reach state is entered in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the second effect movable body 8 has started the operation. For example, when the variable icon h0 is displayed in the display mode B (green), the second effect movable body 8 may not operate and may still remain stationary at the initial position. That is, when the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed, the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 is more likely to be performed than when the display mode B (green) is displayed. You may. Further, when the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed, the second effect movable body is displayed as compared with the display mode C (red) shown in FIG. 59 (g). The operation effect of 8 may be easily performed. That is, it is preferable that the higher the expectation of the big hit, the easier it is for the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 to be performed. When the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed, the operation effect of the second effect movable body 8 may be performed without fail.

In FIG. 60 (h), as in FIG. 59 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and in this example, the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is also hidden. It has become. Further, as in FIG. 59 (h), the forearm portion 82 of the second effect movable body 8 is greatly lifted.

In FIG. 60 (i), it has evolved into a super reach (Den reach), and the reach title LT5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display of the reach title LT5 here is written in black letters on the background display of the maker pattern as "Den reach". Further, in the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 60 (j), the forearm portion 82 vibrates in a state where the forearm portion 82 is lifted high, similarly to the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 59 (j). Further, the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended. As a result, the decoration C becomes visible, but the decoration C has a display mode D (manufacturer pattern) which is a display mode showing red and is a display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. Is a different form of decoration. That is, the decoration is one step lower in terms of the expectation of a big hit. The first finger (thumb) 821 may be extended so that the decoration D (see FIG. 55 (e)) having a 70% expectation of a big hit can be visually recognized. However, even in this case, it is lower than the jackpot expectation (75%) suggested by the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern). Since the player can see the variable icon h0 of the display mode D (maker pattern) having the lowest appearance frequency, and can also see the maker pattern in the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT5. The feeling is sufficiently hot, and the decoration of the second effect movable body 8 may be able to calm the player's feelings a little.

The background display of the reach title LT5 may be a display mode representing the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which is a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT5 is the same as or similar to the maker pattern, and for example, the shape of the polka dots is slightly different from the display mode D (maker pattern) which is the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. Even if there is, if the player can imagine the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), the display mode is similar to the display mode D (maker pattern).

Subsequent FIGS. 60 (i) to (l) are the same as those of FIGS. 59 (i) to (l), and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is the same. Stop is displayed and it becomes a big hit.

FIG. 61A is a diagram showing a reach title background color determination table stored in ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the background color using the reach title background color determination table shown in FIG. 61 (a) in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 51 (a). At this time, as described above, green is always selected as the background color of the reach title LT1 of "Ji Reach", and this background color does not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. On the other hand, the background color of the reach title LT2 of "Swordsman Reach" and the background color of the reach title LT3 (LT4) of "Den Reach" suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the CPU 504 is the first sub-control unit 400. Determine the background color based on the command received from. Both the reach title LT2 of "Swordsman Reach" and the reach title LT3 of "Den Reach" include the maker pattern in the background color. In both reach titles LT2 and LT3, a common one is used as the relationship between the background color and the jackpot expectation degree, but different ones may be used.

FIG. 61B is a diagram showing an emission color determination table stored in ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 50A, the CPU 0404 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the emission color determination table shown in FIG. 61B to emit light in the first effect movable body 7. The emission color of 71 is determined. The emission color of the light emitting unit 71 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the CPU 404 determines the emission color based on the command received from the main control unit 300. The emission colors are white, red, and rainbow colors, and the emission colors of the manufacturer's pattern are not prepared. Further, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red emission color and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the red background color of the reach title described above are different in magnitude of expectation. Further, the magnitude of the expectation is different from the jackpot expectation suggested by the red display mode in the hold icon and the variable icon described with reference to FIG. 54.

FIG. 61 (c) is a diagram showing a kimono color determination table of the lord stored in ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

This determination table is a table for determining the color of the kimono of the lord displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 in the zone effect described with reference to FIG. 57. Similar to the determination of the background color described above, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 is the kimono of the lord based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 51 (a). Determine the color of. At this time, the determination table shown in FIG. 61 (c) is used. As described above, since the maker pattern is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the maker pattern is not prepared as the color of the kimono of the lord. The color of the lord's kimono also suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

In the above description, the effect sounds such as the appearance sound of the hold icon and the variable icon and the change sound of the display mode are output from the speaker 120, but the shortest 16th note corresponds to the display mode B (green). A production sound is output (FIG. 57 (c)), and a short production sound of eighth notes is output corresponding to the display mode C (red) (FIG. 53 (c), FIG. 58 (c), FIG. 59 (Fig. 59). f)), a long production sound of quarter notes is output corresponding to the display mode D (maker pattern) (FIG. 56 (b), FIG. 58 (e), FIG. 60 (f)), display mode E ( The longest production sound of the half note was output corresponding to (rainbow color) (FIG. 58 (g)). That is, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the longer the output time of the production sound is output. Although the effect sound was different for each display mode, the display mode in which the expectation of the jackpot was relatively high (display mode D and the display mode E higher than 50%) and the display in which the expectation of the jackpot was relatively low were displayed. The effect sound may be different depending on the mode (display mode B and display mode C of 50% or less). That is, a special effect sound may be output only when the expectation of the big hit is relatively high. Furthermore, only the appearance sound of the hold icon and the variable icon of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) and the change sound to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) are output, and the specific effect sound different from that of the other display modes is output. You may try to do it. The specific production sound here may be a production sound related to the display mode D (maker pattern) or a production sound representing the display mode D (maker pattern). For example, when the maker pattern is an animal pattern, the specific production sound may be a production sound. , The bark of the animal with the animal pattern may be output as a specific production sound.

Further, in the above description, the character color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 53 (j) and the character color of the zone title ZT shown in FIG. 57 (b) do not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, and conversely. , The background display of the reach title LT2 shown in FIG. 56 (e), the background display of the reach title LT3 shown in FIG. 58 (j), the background display of the reach title LT4 shown in FIG. 59 (i), and the background display of the reach title LT 4 shown in FIG. 60 (i). The background display of the reach title LT5 suggested the degree of expectation of a big hit. However, the display mode of the characters in the title may indicate the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and in this case, the characters of the title will be displayed in different display modes according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot. .. On the contrary, the background display of the title may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. In this case, the background display of the title is always displayed in the same display mode.

Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the title text and background display, the display mode of the cut-in notice display text, background display, and frame display, or the display mode of the dialogue notice text, background display, and balloon line display are the hold icon and the display mode. The display mode (color or pattern) of the variable icon may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, in these notices, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) appears. On the other hand, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) does not appear during the demonstration production.

Further, during the big hit game, the light emitting means (effect lamp 206, the light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, the game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, the left frame lamp 122L, The right frame lamp 122R, the upper frame lamp 122U, the game table frame lamp 452 such as the button lamp 138, etc.) may emit light in a rainbow-colored light emitting mode. Therefore, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode (light emitting mode D) may not suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit unless the symbol variation is displayed. Even during the big hit game, the light emitting means does not emit light in a light emitting mode representing the maker pattern (display mode D).

Further, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be higher in the second gaming state (for example, the special figure high probability state) than in the first gaming state (for example, the special figure low probability state). Further, the appearance frequency of the maker pattern may be a specification that cannot be changed by the setting operation of the player, but if the specification can be changed in the custom mode, the first mode (for example, the non-custom mode (normal mode)). )) In the second mode (for example, custom mode), the appearance frequency of the manufacturer pattern may be higher.

Further, if the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is hit right in a low probability state of the special figure, it takes a long time until the result of the variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed, which is disadvantageous to the player. A maker pattern may appear in a special figure high probability state where a small hit rush can be expected without appearing. Alternatively, in the 1-type and 2-type mixer that wins a V prize via a small hit, the manufacturer pattern does not appear in the variable production in which the small hit is won in the normal game state, and the small hit is won in the short-time game state. In the variable production, there is a possibility that the maker pattern may appear.

Further, although the maker pattern has the lowest appearance frequency, the appearance frequency may be the same as the appearance frequency of the rainbow color. Alternatively, the frequency of appearance of the maker pattern may be lower than the frequency of appearance of red but higher than the frequency of appearance of rainbow color. As described above, the frequency of appearance may be changeable depending on the setting operation of the player.

Further, what has been displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207, or may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 instead of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, as a display means instead of the sub liquid crystal display device 207, a transparent or translucent light guide plate (second display means) covering the game board 200 or the game area 124 is installed in front of the game board 200 or the game area 124. You may. This light guide plate is an optical member that emits light incident from the side toward the front, and the light emitting mode can be switched depending on the color of the incident light. It is possible to display a picture. Even when the light guide plate is used instead of the sub liquid crystal display device 207, the manufacturer's pattern is not displayed.

Further, in the description from FIG. 53 to FIG. 60, the expectation of the big hit may be expressed (may not be expressed), white, green, red, gold, rainbow color, and the manufacturer's pattern that always indicates the expectation of the big hit. Although it is described using blue, which does not represent the degree of expectation of a big hit, other colors and patterns may be used respectively.

Further, when the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon is changed, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is prevented from changing from the default display mode, while the display mode E (rainbow color) is changed from the default display mode. It may be changed, and in this case, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or the display mode C (red) may be changed. And it may be possible to change from the display mode B (green). On the contrary, even if the default display mode is not changed to the display mode E (rainbow color), the default display mode may be changed to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). good. In this case, the display mode E (rainbow color) may be changed only from the display mode C (red), or may be changed from the display mode C (red) and the display mode B (green). May be possible. Further, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed from the display mode C (red) and the display mode B (green) in addition to the default display mode.

As described above, various effects using colors have been described, but predetermined colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 (predetermined colors displayed by the background display of the reach title, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the zone title). ), Light emitting means (effect lamp 206, light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R. , Upper frame lamp 122U, game table frame lamp 452 such as button lamp 138, etc.), predetermined color to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 207 (Den-sama's kimono), and the second effect movable body. Strictly speaking, the predetermined color of the decoration of the decorative body included in 8 has a different hue in each display because the display medium and the effect are different.

However, even if the colors are slightly different, if the player can imagine that the color is a "predetermined color" (for example, red), the "predetermined color" of each display represents the same "predetermined color". It can be said that they are the same or similar "predetermined colors".

FIG. 62 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 62), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 has. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 62) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a downhill winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and two bets are inserted when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1034 is a slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034, and the insertion means that both are included. be. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize in some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is executed to draw a lottery as to which of the plurality of types of combinations is won, and the slot machine 1000 is operated. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1043 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 is provided, and this effect button 1091 is also a button lamp (not shown). It emits light.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1080 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 composed of two right doors 1063a and a left door 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 arranged on the back side of the door member 1063. It has the same effect movable body 1058 as the second effect movable body 8 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42, and the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b are horizontally outside in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057. When opened, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (on the player side), and the effect movable body 1058 also appears on the right side thereof. A light emitting diode (not shown) capable of emitting full color is arranged in the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b. Further, the effect movable body 1058 shown in FIG. 62 also includes the decorative body described with reference to FIG. 55. It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various effect images and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, and may include, for example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. It may be a display device or the like. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62, a sub liquid crystal display device may be provided separately from the liquid crystal display device 1057.

The liquid crystal display device 1057 and / and the sub-liquid crystal display device display display modes A to E in a title character display, a title background display, a notice background display, a notice frame display, a notice character display, and the like. Used. That is, the display of the maker pattern of the display mode D is also used. In the slot machine 1000, each display of the display mode A to the display mode E is a suggestion image suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the AT state and the degree of expectation of bonus acquisition. Further, the side lamp 1044, the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, the button lamp (not shown) for causing the effect button 1091 to emit light, and the like can emit light in the light emitting modes A to E. However, it does not emit light in the light emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means into the gaming area is discharged from the gaming area and can be supplied to the launching means again. Further, a display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game table, and is shown in FIG. 42. The sphere storage dish 126 shown is not provided. This enclosed pachinko machine encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball inside the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball, and the payout of the ball is executed by credit. It may be.

According to the above description
Suggestion image [for example, hold icon, variable icon, character display of title, etc.] that suggests the degree of expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit, the degree of expectation of transitioning to the AT state, the degree of expectation of bonus acquisition, etc.] , Title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] and display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, sub liquid crystal display device 207, liquid crystal display device 1057, etc.] ,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of light emitting modes [For example, for a game board such as an effect lamp 206, a light emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7, and a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in an attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 44. Lamp 442 (see FIG. 45), left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, button lamp 138 and other game table frame lamps 452 (see FIG. 45) shown in FIG. A light emitting diode (not shown) arranged on the side lamp 1044, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, a button lamp (not shown) that causes the effect button 1091 to emit light, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The display means displays the suggested image in the first display mode [for example, the white display mode shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 61 (a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 54 (b), and FIG. 54 ( c), the display mode of red shown in FIG. 61 (a), etc.] can be displayed.
The display means can display the suggestion image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 54 (d) and 61 (a)]. It is a thing
The second display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first display mode [for example, 75%].
The light emitting means is a first light emitting mode showing the first display mode [for example, a white light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 61 (b), and a green light emitting mode shown in FIG. 54 (b). There are cases where light is emitted depending on the mode, the red light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 54 (c) and 61 (b), etc.].
The light emitting means may not emit light in the second light emitting mode [for example, a light emitting mode having green and yellow polka dots on a white background] representing the second display mode.
The gaming table is characterized by [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 and the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62]. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, may be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode may be enhanced.

The degree of expectation may be the expectation of a big hit.

Further, the light emitting means may be a board lamp or a frame lamp. Alternatively, it may be a light emitting body provided in an accessory such as a movable means.

Further, even if the first light emitting mode is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient that the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Further, the light emitting means does not emit light in a light emitting mode in which a relationship with the second display mode is generally recognized.

Further, the display means can display the suggested image in the fourth display mode, and the display suggesting that the first display mode has a higher degree of expectation than the fourth display mode. It may be an embodiment. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is lower than that of the first display mode, or a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is 0%. It may be a display mode which does not suggest the degree of expectation.

also,
"The display means can display the suggestion image in the third display mode [for example, the rainbow-colored display mode shown in FIGS. 54 (e) and 61 (a)].
The third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the second display mode [for example, 100%].
The light emitting means may emit light in a third light emitting mode [for example, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 54 (e) and 61 (b)] representing the third display mode. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The first light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the first display mode.
The second light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the second display mode.
The third light emitting mode is the same as or similar to the third display mode.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first light emitting mode is a light emitting mode related to the first display mode, and the second light emitting mode is a light emitting mode related to the second display mode. The light emitting mode may be a light emitting mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first light emitting mode and the first display mode are only differences due to the difference between the light emitting means and the display means, the first light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. It can be said that the light emitting mode is the same as the display mode, and the third light emitting mode can be said to be the same light emitting mode as the third display mode.

also,
"The second display mode is a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, yellow and green].
The third display mode is also a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, seven colors constituting the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is 100%.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, the third display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed.

also,
"The second display mode is a display mode [for example, a maker pattern or a maker color] that symbolizes a manufacturing company or a sales company of a game table.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturer or the sales company of the game console can be recognized.

According to the above description
Suggestion image [for example, hold icon, variable icon, title character display] suggesting "expectation that the player will be advantageous [for example, expectation of big hit, expectation of transition to AT state, expectation of bonus acquisition, etc.]" , Title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] on display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44, sub liquid crystal display device 207, FIG. 62. Liquid crystal display device 1057, etc.]
Movable means in which the player side is a movable area rather than the display means [for example, the first effect movable body 7 shown in FIG. 44, the second effect movable body 8, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b shown in FIG. 62, the effect movable body. Body 1058] and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means displays the suggested image in the first display mode [for example, the white display mode shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 61 (a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 54 (b), and FIG. 54 ( c), the display mode in red shown in FIG. 61 (a)].
The display means can display the suggestion image in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background shown in FIGS. 54 (d) and 61 (a)]. It is a thing
The second display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first display mode [for example, 75%].
The movable means is the first decoration according to the display mode showing the first display mode [for example, the white decoration shown in FIG. 55 (a), the green decoration shown in FIG. 55 (b), or FIG. 55 (c). ) Shown in red decoration]
The movable means does not include a second decoration according to the display mode representing the second display mode [for example, a decoration of a green and yellow polka dot pattern (maker pattern) on a white background] [for example, FIG. 55. reference],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, may be improved, and the expectation and special feeling of the second display mode may be enhanced. Further, since the movable means in which the player side is the movable area rather than the display means does not include the second decoration, it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the second display mode has appeared, which is expected. It is possible to reduce the excessive agitation of the feeling.

The degree of expectation may be the expectation of a big hit.

Further, the movable means may be an effect movable means (role).

Further, even if the first decoration is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient that the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Further, the movable means is not provided with a decoration generally recognized to be related to the second display mode.

The decoration may be a part painted with a color or a pattern. That is, it may be a portion where the color or pattern does not change. Alternatively, it may be a portion for displaying a color or a pattern (such as a liquid crystal display device or a light emitting diode), or may be a portion capable of displaying in a different color or pattern.

Further, the display means can display the suggested image in the fourth display mode, and the display suggesting that the first display mode has a higher degree of expectation than the fourth display mode. It may be an embodiment. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is lower than that of the first display mode, or a display mode suggesting that the expectation level is 0%. It may be a display mode which does not suggest the degree of expectation.

also,
"The display means can display the suggestion image in the third display mode [for example, the rainbow-colored display mode shown in FIGS. 54 (e) and 61 (a)].
The third display mode is a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the second display mode [for example, 100%].
The movable means does not include a third decoration [for example, a rainbow-colored decoration] according to the display mode representing the third display mode [see, for example, FIG. 55].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The movable means is provided with a first portion [for example, a second finger (index finger) 822] on which the display according to the display mode representing the first display mode is displayed, and the movable means is provided with the movable means. Can take a state in which the first part is invisible to the player and a state in which the first part is visible to the player, and the movable means represents the second display mode. It may not be provided with the second part where the display according to the display mode is displayed. Further, the movable means may not be provided with a third portion in which the display according to the display mode representing the third display mode is displayed (see FIG. 55).

also,
"The first decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the first display mode.
The second decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the second display mode.
The game table is characterized in that the third decoration is a decoration having the same or similar display mode as the third display mode. 』\
Was also explained.

The first decoration is a decoration according to the display mode related to the first display mode, and the second decoration is a decoration according to the display mode related to the second display mode. The third decoration may be a decoration according to the display mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first decoration and the first display mode are only differences due to the difference between the movable means and the display means, the first decoration is the first display mode. It can be said that the display mode is the same as that of.

Further, the second display mode is a display mode using a plurality of colors, and the third display mode may also be a display mode using a plurality of colors.

Further, the third display mode may be a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is 100%.

also,
"The movable means displays the suggestion image of the second display mode rather than [for example, FIG. 59 (g)] when the suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed on the display means. If this is the case, [for example, FIG. 60 (g)] is easier to move.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The second display mode is a display mode that symbolizes a manufacturing company or a sales company of a game table. 』\
Was also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the manufacturer or the sales company of the game console can be recognized.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, etc. described above, the constituent requirement can be changed to another embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, and the like. And various examples may be applied. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, etc. Even if it is applied to various examples, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 106 Front frame door 124 Game area 126 Ball storage tray 136 Direction button 190 Operation key unit 191 Up button 192 Down button 200 Game board 201 Game board 206 Production lamp 207 Sub liquid crystal display device 208 Decorative symbol display device 210 Ordinary symbol display Device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 228 Normal drawing start port 23 Attacker unit 234 1st variable winning opening, variable winning opening 2341 Door member 235 2nd variable winning opening 2351 Door member 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 2nd sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 Memory 7 1st effect movable body 71 Light emitting part 8 2nd effect movable body 81 Upper arm part 82 Forearm part 821 First finger (thumb)
822 Second finger (index finger)
823 3rd finger (middle finger)
824 4th finger (ring finger)
825 5th finger (pinkie)
h11, h12 Hold icon h0 Variable icon LT1 to LT5 Reach title ZT Zone title MC Music selection display MD Music selection decision display LH1 Left-handed first display LH2 Left-handed second display RH1 Right-handed first display RH2 Right-handed second display

Claims (3)

The first vibrating means capable of performing the first vibrating operation,
A display means capable of displaying a first image related to the first vibration means, and a display means.
It is a game table equipped with
The first vibration means can start the execution of the first vibration operation after the first image is displayed.
The display means can display a certain image related to the hit / fail determination result after displaying the first image.
The first case where the first vibration operation is executed at the first timing after starting the display of the first image, and the first at the second timing later than the first timing. There is a second case where the vibration operation is performed, and
In the first case, the display means displays the certain image after starting the display of the first image, and even in the second case, after starting the display of the first image, the display means. It displays a certain image,
The first vibrating means ends the first vibrating operation before the end of displaying a certain image in either the first case or the second case. And
The first vibrating means is capable of performing a second vibrating operation.
The first vibration operation has a longer vibration time than the second vibration operation.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 1.
The display means does not display the first image before the execution of the second vibration operation is started.
A game table featuring that. The game console according to claim 1 or 2.
There is a third case where the first vibration operation is not executed even if the display of the first image is started.
In the third case, the display means does not display the certain image after starting the display of the first image.
A game table featuring that.

Images